Skip to main content

Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business

Qualification Awarded and the Level of Qualification

Bachelor of Business Administration, EQF 6

Contact Information

Head of Degree Programme
Syed Mubaraz
Study Councellor
Janne Hopeela

Special Admission Requirements

General admission criteria, see TAMK’s websites.

Recognition of Prior Learning

It is possible for students to have their prior competences recognised.

Qualification Requirements and Regulations

Completion of Degree Programme in International Business curriculum studies and achievement of related competence objectives.

Profile of the Programme

The degree is a Bachelor's Degree -level professional higher education degree.
The degree complies with the criteria set by the Finnish national degree system as well as with the European framework for degrees and other competences.

Key Learning Outcomes

The objective of the TAMK BBA in International Business is to prepare undergraduates for tasks demanding business expertise and for entry-level managerial positions worldwide. The Programme is targeted at students who want to work in a multicultural environment. The students will learn basic business skills and acquire competence essential for success in today’s international working life. The Programme will challenge you to look for your field of expertise and career path in business. A key element of the Programme is a required period of study abroad.
More detailed descriptions of the TAMK BBA in International Business courses, study methods, and grounds for assessment can be found in the online curriculum of the Programme: 16IB
STRUCTURE OF STUDIES
The BBA Degree Programme consists of the following parts:
• Basic and Professional Studies (145 ECTS credit points) including a required International Study Exchange of 4 - 6 months,
• Free-Choice Studies (20 ECTS credit points),
• International Practical Training (30 ECTS credit points)
• Bachelor’s Thesis (15 ECTS credit points)
For Finnish nationals, both a semester of study abroad and a practical training placement abroad are required parts of the degree Programme. For the students of other nationalities, study and training periods abroad are highly recommended but not required.
First Year - Basics of International Business
During the first year of studies, the objective is to give the students a broad perspective on the business operations of a company, including computing and communication skills. A theoretical approach is combined with learning-by-doing. Students learn to apply theory in practice right from the start, as they establish and operate a fictional Practice Enterprise.
Working life skills and competence are developed through the Practice Enterprise, through other modes of learning, and in collaborative learning sessions under the guidance of a team coach. In addition to the supervising work on the Practice Enterprise throughout the first year, the coaches have an on-going role in promoting individual and team learning skills. Within their teams, students learn together and practice their collaboration skills.
The contents of the first year study are presented in detail in separate module guides, which are distributed to students at the beginning of the academic year.
Second Year – Choosing the Fields of Specialization
At the end of the first year, the students will start to plan their own career paths. The second year will give the students a deeper insight into the functions of an internationalizing company.
They can choose two specialization modules (each 15 ECTS credit points) out of the following 7 options: Marketing, Finance, Supply Chain Management, Tourism, Entrepreneurship, Innovation and Multicultural Management.
Third Year – Exchange Studies and Practical Training
During the third year, the students (Finnish nationals) choose a foreign partner university for their semester of study abroad (= 4 - 6 months). The International Business Programme has some 130 partner universities all over the world. In addition, students (Finnish nationals) will spend a further 5 months abroad in a practical training placement. It can be done anywhere in the world; students are free to arrange their training placements to suit their own international career plans.
Fourth Year – Bachelor’s Thesis and Developing Professional Expertise
Ideally, the organization where students did their practical training will also commission their Bachelor’s Thesis, which is a development project requiring them to apply their knowledge and expertise to solve a specific problem for the company concerned.
Free-Choice Studies, 15 ECTS credits points
The TAMK BBA in International Business offers a selection of Free-Choice Studies in English. In addition to that, the yearly selection varies according to themes offered by visiting guest lecturers from partner universities.
International Practical Training, 30 ECTS credit points
The International Practical Training in the TAMK BBA in International Business Programme is done abroad (The Finnish nationals). The 5 month supervised placement gives the BBA students a chance to learn more about their own field of specialization. It is a learning process which is beneficial for the student, the company providing the placement and TAMK School of Business and Services. For the students of other nationalities, study and training periods abroad are highly recommended but not required.
Bachelor's Thesis, 15 ECTS credit points
The objective of the Bachelor's Thesis is to combine theoretical knowledge with practical skills, and in this way to produce topical solutions for the organization's needs. The thesis is written following the practices of scientific reporting and with emphasis on practical solutions for existing problems within the organization concerned. It can be a planning or development task, a research, a product, or a guide done for a company, a branch of local government, or other organizations. Ideally, the students should find a practical case for their final thesis during the practical training. Writing the Bachelor's Thesis will take from four to six months, depending on the topic and level of difficulty.
STUDYING
By studying in TAMK BBA in International Business Programme students learn how to function in business life. Students learn the habit of planning and keeping to schedules, co-operation skills, and the ability to access, evaluate, and deploy useful information. Learning is carried out by using a variety of methods, such as
• contact teaching
• virtual studies
• blended learning
• case studies
• development discussions
• research and development assignments with companies
• intensive programmes with international partner universities
• independent studies
• team-based assignments
• individual company projects
• portfolios
Student performance is graded on a scale of 1-5, unless otherwise stated. Setting and reaching personal study goals is the responsibility of each individual student. If a problem should arise with their studies, students can get help from a number of sources; the coaches, teachers, study counsellors, final thesis supervisors, study secretaries, student tutors, and the Head of International Business Programme.

Occupational Profiles of Graduates with Examples

Graduates from the TAMK BBA in International Business Programme face exciting professional opportunities in the fields, e.g. marketing, sales, export-import operations, product management, hospitality management and customer relations. TAMK graduates also work in supply chain management, project management or as consultants or entrepreneurs.

Access to Further Studies

After BBA graduation, you will be eligible to apply for a Master’s Degree programme in Finland or abroad.
TAMK School of Business and Services provides a strong foundation for further studies in an internationally competitive, English-taught Master’s Degree Programme in International Business Management.
The Universities of Applied Sciences require 3 years of work experience from the field.

Examination Regulations, Assessment and Grading

Assessment of study performances is based on TAMK assessment criteria.
The detailed assessment criteria can be found in course implementation plans. The teaching and assessment methods are agreed on with students at the beginning of each course.

Graduation Requirements

Completion of studies and achievement of competence objectives in the extent set by the curriculum.

Mode of Study

Day time teaching

Development of the Programme

The Ministry of Education and Culture’s definitions of policy and TAMK’s strategy have been considered in the curriculum.
The Degree Programme in International Business will be continuously developed based on the feedback from the students and employers.

Degree Programme in International Business
Code
(24IB)

Studies for Exchange Students, International Business, Autumn
Code
(24KVIBS)
Degree Programme in International Business
Code
(22IB)

Studies for Exchange Students, International Business, Autumn
Code
(23KVIBS)

Studies for Exchange Students, International Business, Spring
Code
(24KVIBK)
Degree Programme in International Business
Code
(22IB)

Studies for Exchange Students, International Business, Autumn
Code
(22KVIBS)

Studies for Exchange Students, International Business, Spring
Code
(23KVIBK)
Degree Programme in International Business
Code
(21IB)

Studies for Exchange Students, International Business, Autumn
Code
(21KVIBS)

Studies for Exchange Students, International Business, Spring
Code
(22KVIBK)
Degree Programme in International Business
Code
(19IB)

Studies for Exchange Students, International Business, Autumn
Code
(20KVIBS)

Studies for Exchange Students, International Business, Spring
Code
(21KVIBK)
Degree Programme in International Business
Code
(19IB)

Studies for Exchange Students, International Business, Autumn
Code
(19KVIBS)

Studies for Exchange Students, International Business, Spring
Code
(20KVIBK)
Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 31.08.2023

Timing

28.08.2023 - 11.12.2023

Credits

3 op

Virtual portion

1 op

Mode of delivery

67 % Contact teaching, 33 % Distance learning

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Emmanuel Abruquah
  • Janne Hopeela
Person in charge

Emmanuel Abruquah

Groups
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

This course deals with academic communication in sufficient depth and detail to enable students to present research work and write reports in academic style, as may be required for other courses in this degree programm. Most of the topics covered will also be relevant to writing a final thesis, so this course can be considered as a basic introduction to that process.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:

- Demonstrate familiarity with the principles of academic communication.
- Access and critically evaluate relevant source materials.
- Get familiar with the concept of plagiarism and know how to avoid it in their own work.
- Incorporate in-text references to source materials and compile a list of sources, following TAMK requirements.
- Produce academic texts which meet set criteria: clear, accurate and formal English, coherent structure.
- Present constructive and well-justified verbal arguments and feedback in formal, face-to-face academic settings, such as seminars and public lectures.
- Utilize resources and learning strategies to develop their own communication skills independently.

Content (course unit)

What are the key features of academic communication and how does it differ from organizational communication?
What are the roles of verbal and written communication in the academic context?
What norms and standards must academic writing meet?
What stages must a a writer process to produce an academic text?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student communicates in comprehensible English overall and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text. References to source materials are included where appropriate.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student's English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets the norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student's written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style, reports meet the norms for different types of text. He/she shows ability to access and select appropriate information. References to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways, source materials are expertly paraphrased. Oral expression is fluent and professional.

Location and time

B3-27

Exam schedules

There is no exam. To pass the course, a student should:
- Attend 80% of the lessons.
- Complete the exercises on Moodle.
- Submit the required assignments on time.
- Participate in the essay presentation.
- Write a reflective self-evaluation essay.

Assessment methods and criteria

Evaluation is based on completing 80% of attendance and completion of coursework.
Participation and activity in the lessons should be, at least 80%.
Coursework, assignments and self-study make up 20% of the final grade (submitted to the designated folders)

Using TAMK's template correctly
Make sure in-text references follow TAMK's recommended style.
Make sure the List of references has been correctly written, following TAMK's recommended style, it is arranged in alphabetical order and the references have the corresponding in-text references.
Giving feedback and reflective self-evaluation essay 20%
The final essay is 60%. Make sure to acknowledge using artificial intelligence ChatGPT with a score not exceeding 20% of your work.
A minimum of grade 3 will be awarded if all the conditions are fulfilled.
If the references are not written correctly, it is an automatic FAIL

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Lectures, group work, workshops, consultation

Learning materials

Materials will be provided on TUNI-Moodle, in addition to student's materials.

Student workload

Students must:
- search for authentic source materials for their selected or chosen topic for writing the literature-based essay.
- learn how to write in-text citations and bibliography correctly per TAMK's recommendations as in TAMK's report guide.

Content scheduling

Initial theory
Writing processes
Draft and consultation
Proofreading exercises and activities
Presentations and submission of final essays

Completion alternatives

A student can complete this course by accreditation: that is if the student has previously written a thesis for a higher education institute or completed a course with similar content.

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The students accumulate points from the coursework.
Marks Grade 20 60
90-100 5 20 60
85-89 4 15 55
70-84 3 10 50
<70 Fail

Enrolment period

15.12.2023 - 15.01.2024

Timing

24.01.2024 - 08.05.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Emmanuel Abruquah
  • Janne Hopeela
Person in charge

Emmanuel Abruquah

Groups
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

This course deals with academic communication in sufficient depth and detail to enable students to present research work and write reports in academic style, as may be required for other courses in this degree programm. Most of the topics covered will also be relevant to writing a final thesis, so this course can be considered as a basic introduction to that process.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:

- Demonstrate familiarity with the principles of academic communication.
- Access and critically evaluate relevant source materials.
- Get familiar with the concept of plagiarism and know how to avoid it in their own work.
- Incorporate in-text references to source materials and compile a list of sources, following TAMK requirements.
- Produce academic texts which meet set criteria: clear, accurate and formal English, coherent structure.
- Present constructive and well-justified verbal arguments and feedback in formal, face-to-face academic settings, such as seminars and public lectures.
- Utilize resources and learning strategies to develop their own communication skills independently.

Content (course unit)

What are the key features of academic communication and how does it differ from organizational communication?
What are the roles of verbal and written communication in the academic context?
What norms and standards must academic writing meet?
What stages must a a writer process to produce an academic text?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student communicates in comprehensible English overall and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text. References to source materials are included where appropriate.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student's English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets the norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student's written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style, reports meet the norms for different types of text. He/she shows ability to access and select appropriate information. References to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways, source materials are expertly paraphrased. Oral expression is fluent and professional.

Assessment scale

0-5

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 22.01.2024

Timing

13.02.2024 - 25.04.2024

Credits

6 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 35

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Pasi Kuusijärvi
Person in charge

Pasi Kuusijärvi

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The course completes the students’ accounting and finance module studies and consists of two parts.

Firstly, the students study and learn about the working capital management concept and theory. Studying this part is linked to understanding of typical corporate life from start-up to growth company – and further on to the mature business phase.

Secondly, a selection of advanced industry-specific and other themes and topics are assigned to the students, enabling them to link their accounting and finance studies to their own favorite industries or some most motivating current themes and topics of today’s business life.

After completing the course, students will be able to:

Apply their finance and managerial accounting skills to industry-specific business cases.
See and analyze the big picture of working capital case-specifically, react immediately when necessary - and initiate business development actions based on the analysis.
Control the working capital professionally, using performance measures such as current ratio, turnover of inventory, turnovers of accounts receivable and payable, as well as gearing %.
Calculate the profitability of working capital investment using the net present value (NPV) method.
Identify the need for using advanced methods such as just-in-time (JIT) management, lean accounting and environmental accounting when necessary.
Create basic-level cash plans and cash flow forecasts.

Content (course unit)

What is the working capital concept, and what is the strategic importance of it?
What is the working capital cycle, and how can working capital be managed successfully?
How can cash and inventory processes and balances be improved?
How can the management of trade receivables and payables as well as cash flows be enhanced?
What is gearing %, and how can it be used in practice?
Which industries, current trends and phenomena are potential ones for advanced accounting and finance efforts and applications?
When is it time for environmental or lean accounting, or e.g. for applying the just-in-time (JIT) method?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of cash management and working capital management, as well as some cash flow and digital finance related industry or case specific applications. He/she can take responsibility for his individual duties in routine cash and working capital management as well as related measurement and reporting activities, and is able to make some contribution in a group.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has the competence of applying and explaining the concepts and methods of cash and working capital management as well as performing cash flow and digital finance in related industry or case specific analyses in controllable situations. He/she works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. He/she can solve cash and working capital management problems as well as work on cash flow and digital finance related measurement, reporting and development activities. His/her courses of action are well justified.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can analyse complex situations and produce alternative solution proposals to various cash and working capital management problems. He/she can produce cash flow and digital finance related industry or case specific analyses. He/she can apply his extensive knowledge and skills of the subject matter excellently in problem solving, experiments, and when working on cash flow and digital finance related analysis, reporting and business development activities. His/her courses of action are very well justified, and he can work individually, making remarkable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly with excellent commitment.

Assessment criteria, pass/fail (course unit)

The student does not perform in the course exam acceptably, or he/she does not complete the compulsory exercises, assignments and/or other compulsory items on the course agendas acceptably.

Location and time

From February 15 to April 25, 2024.

The first class will be there at TAMK Kuntokatu main campus on Feb 15, 2024.
The last class will be there at TAMK main campus Apr 25, 2024.

Exam schedules

No written exam.

Assessment methods and criteria

Student’s overall course grade is based on
1. the evaluation criteria of this course
2. active individual participation in the classes
3. performing the assigned exercises acceptably
4. his/her group assignment performance, including both contribution in the group's own report and action in an opposing team.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Learning discussions, group assignments, exercises, case studies, literature, lecturing.

Learning materials

Bhimani, A., Datar, S., Horngren, C.T. & Rajan, M. 2018. Management and Cost Accounting. 7th ed. Harlow, United Kingdom: Pearson Education.
Especially chapters 13-14.
ISBN: 9781292232669. EISBN: 9781292232676.
https://andor.tuni.fi/permalink/358FIN_TAMPO/176jdvt/cdi_askewsholts_vlebooks_9781292232676

Other books and learning material will be informed to the course participants during the course implementation.

In addition, students and the groups of them perform task-specific data collection, as part of their exercises and group assignments.

Student workload

Max. some 160 hours as workload; approx. 20 hours of that as contact teaching.

Content scheduling

Studying cash, investment and working capital management forms the first key part of the course, studying digital and sustainable finance the second/last part.

The study process 2024:
1. Introduction - incl. rehearsal about the liquidity and solvency measures
2. Cash Budget
3. Capital Budgeting - incl. especially the Discounted Cash Flow (DCF) methods (NPV, IRR, Payback)
4. The Cash Flow Statement (both the Indirect and Direct method)
5. Participation in the Eye on TAMK 2024 Intl Week (or a corresponding live or online event/webinar)
6. Working Capital Management - incl. also e.g. the Gearing-% measurement
7. Digital and Sustainable Finance - as Group assignment.

Completion alternatives

No, there are not.

Practical training and working life cooperation

A company visit, or a guest speaker making a visit to us is possible during the course implementation.

International connections

Participation in, at least, one guest lecture on Eye on TAMK 2024 Intl Week (or a corresponding live or online event/webinar) in spring 2024 is required.

In addition, the truly international group of students studies keenly together both during the classes at TAMK, and virtually.

Further information

Pasi Kuusijärvi, M.Sc. (Econ. & Bus. Adm.), AmO, HHJ PJ
Senior Lecturer, Accounting and Financial Management

Tampere University of Applied Sciences (TAMK)
Tampere, Finland

pasi.kuusijarvi@tuni.fi
Tel. +358 40 846 3052
www.tuni.fi

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 12.01.2024

Timing

08.01.2024 - 23.02.2024

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Pia Lamminsivu
Person in charge

Pia Lamminsivu

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

The course introduces the basics of financial accounting. Students will learn bookkeeping in virtual companies.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Describe the basic concepts and principles of accounting
• Record basic business transactions in accounting

Content (course unit)

• What are the purposes of accounting and who are the users of accounting information?
• What is the conceptual framework in accounting?
• What are the phases of an accounting period?
• What does double-entry accounting mean?
• What is accounting equation?
• How are business transactions recorded in accounting?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can recognise and define fundamentals of financial accounting. He/she knows the stages of accounting period and is able to record basic financial transactions using bookkeeping software. The student takes responsibility for his/her own work in individual assignments.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting well. The student can use bookkeeping software at a basic level. The student takes responsibility for his/her own work and recognises and follows the important courses of action in the field.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting in an excellent manner. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student can use bookkeeping software well at a basic level. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner and develops his/her own and the group’s interaction.

Location and time

Weeks 2-8/2024

Exam schedules

Exam week 7/2024 (preliminary)

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- lectures
- assignments
- teamwork

Learning materials

The list of recommended litterature is available in course Moodle

Student workload

2 ECTS, approximately 54 h

Completion alternatives

----

Practical training and working life cooperation

----

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has failed in achieving the objectives of the course.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands fundamentals of financial accounting and knows the basic functions of Fennoa book-keeping program.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting well. Student can use Fennoa book-keeping program at a basic level.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting in an excellent manner. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. Student can use Fennoa book-keeping program well at a basic level.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 12.01.2024

Timing

08.01.2024 - 23.02.2024

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Pia Lamminsivu
Person in charge

Pia Lamminsivu

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

The course introduces the basics of financial accounting. Students will learn bookkeeping in virtual companies.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Describe the basic concepts and principles of accounting
• Record basic business transactions in accounting

Content (course unit)

• What are the purposes of accounting and who are the users of accounting information?
• What is the conceptual framework in accounting?
• What are the phases of an accounting period?
• What does double-entry accounting mean?
• What is accounting equation?
• How are business transactions recorded in accounting?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can recognise and define fundamentals of financial accounting. He/she knows the stages of accounting period and is able to record basic financial transactions using bookkeeping software. The student takes responsibility for his/her own work in individual assignments.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting well. The student can use bookkeeping software at a basic level. The student takes responsibility for his/her own work and recognises and follows the important courses of action in the field.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting in an excellent manner. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student can use bookkeeping software well at a basic level. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner and develops his/her own and the group’s interaction.

Location and time

Weeks 2-8/2024

Exam schedules

Exam week 7/2024 (preliminary)

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- lectures
- assignments
- teamwork

Learning materials

The list of recommended litterature is available in course Moodle

Student workload

2 ECTS, approximately 54 h

Completion alternatives

----

Practical training and working life cooperation

----

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has failed in achieving the objectives of the course.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands fundamentals of financial accounting and knows the basic functions of Fennoa book-keeping program.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting well. Student can use Fennoa book-keeping program at a basic level.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting in an excellent manner. Student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. Student can use Fennoa book-keeping program well at a basic level.

Enrolment period

06.02.2024 - 06.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 15.05.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Elena Grigorova
Person in charge

Elena Grigorova

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course describes the first steps of the internationalization process of small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs). Students learn to make a basic market analysis of a new target market for a company. Students analyze international marketing environment (macro and micro) of the target country and help the company with their internationalization plan.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Search for market information of a new target market
• Describe the contents of an international market analysis.
• Analyze international marketing environment of a target country
• Apply the knowledge of the market analysis to company’s internationalization plan.
• Work effectively in a multicultural team.

Content (course unit)

• How to find market information of a new target market?
• What is international market analysis?
• What are the special features of international marketing environment?
• What knowledge is needed when entering into a new target country?
• How to work effectively in a multicultural team?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is familiar with basic concepts of international business. He/she is aware of common export modes. The student knows how to identify factors that indicate potential export markets in order to define market entry modes. The student can identify selected sources of market information and apply that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working in a multicultural team.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has comprehensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can analyse and select suitable export modes. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating promising export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify a variety of sources of market information and relate that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively in a multicultural team.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has extensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can identify, analyse and select the accurate export modes in a variety of situations. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating strong export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify an extensive variety of sources of market information. He/she can utilize and apply that market information in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively and productively in a multicultural team.

Location and time

On campus according to the timetable

Exam schedules

See Methods and Grounds for Evaluation

Assessment methods and criteria

The assessment is based on successful completion of the following tasks and assignments:
• project work for the commissioner's company (report and presentation)
• written exam
• course participation

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Lectures, group work, independent study, research, project work

Learning materials

• Course book: International Business: The New Realities, Knight, Gary; Riesenberger, John; Cavusgil, S. Tamer, 2016
• Materials in Moodle

Student workload

Total hours: 3 cr x 27 h = 81 h including:
• contact lessons 21 hours (7 x 3 h)
• independent study and research 60 hours

Content scheduling

• Sources of information for international market analysis
• Foreign market selection criteria
• External business environment (PESTEL analysis of a given market)
• Entry modes to a foreign market

Completion alternatives

If a student has completed corresponding studies at another university or university of applied sciences, the student may apply for credit transfer through HyväHot / CreTa system.

Such cases have to be discussed with the course teacher at the beginning of the course, and students may be required to complete additional assignments to demonstrate their knowledge and skills.

Practical training and working life cooperation

The main project of the course is carried out in cooperation with a commissioner (Finnish company).

Further information

Mandatory attendance - 80%
Active participation in group work
Research skills

Enrolment period

06.02.2024 - 06.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 15.05.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Elena Grigorova
Person in charge

Elena Grigorova

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course describes the first steps of the internationalization process of small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs). Students learn to make a basic market analysis of a new target market for a company. Students analyze international marketing environment (macro and micro) of the target country and help the company with their internationalization plan.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Search for market information of a new target market
• Describe the contents of an international market analysis.
• Analyze international marketing environment of a target country
• Apply the knowledge of the market analysis to company’s internationalization plan.
• Work effectively in a multicultural team.

Content (course unit)

• How to find market information of a new target market?
• What is international market analysis?
• What are the special features of international marketing environment?
• What knowledge is needed when entering into a new target country?
• How to work effectively in a multicultural team?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is familiar with basic concepts of international business. He/she is aware of common export modes. The student knows how to identify factors that indicate potential export markets in order to define market entry modes. The student can identify selected sources of market information and apply that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working in a multicultural team.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has comprehensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can analyse and select suitable export modes. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating promising export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify a variety of sources of market information and relate that knowledge in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively in a multicultural team.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has extensive knowledge of the concepts used in international business. He/she can identify, analyse and select the accurate export modes in a variety of situations. The student knows how to identify and evaluate the factors indicating strong export market potential and is able to match them with the most suitable market entry modes. The student can identify an extensive variety of sources of market information. He/she can utilize and apply that market information in the context of a company’s internationalisation strategy. The student is capable of working effectively and productively in a multicultural team.

Location and time

On campus according to the timetable

Exam schedules

See Methods and Grounds for Evaluation

Assessment methods and criteria

The assessment is based on successful completion of the following tasks and assignments:
• project work for the commissioner's company (report and presentation)
• written exam
• course participation

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Lectures, group work, independent study, research, project work

Learning materials

• Course book: International Business: The New Realities, Knight, Gary; Riesenberger, John; Cavusgil, S. Tamer, 2016
• Materials in Moodle

Student workload

Total hours: 3 cr x 27 h = 81 h including:
• contact lessons 21 hours (7 x 3 h)
• independent study and research 60 hours

Content scheduling

• Sources of information for international market analysis
• Foreign market selection criteria
• External business environment (PESTEL analysis of a given market)
• Entry modes to a foreign market

Completion alternatives

If a student has completed corresponding studies at another university or university of applied sciences, the student may apply for credit transfer through HyväHot / CreTa system.

Such cases have to be discussed with the course teacher at the beginning of the course, and students may be required to complete additional assignments to demonstrate their knowledge and skills.

Practical training and working life cooperation

The main project of the course is carried out in cooperation with a commissioner (Finnish company).

Further information

Mandatory attendance - 80%
Active participation in group work
Research skills

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 31.08.2023

Timing

01.09.2023 - 23.10.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Teaching languages
  • Finnish
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Mari Touronen
Person in charge

Mari Touronen

Groups
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

Kurssi on tarkoitettu IB:n suomenkielisille opiskelijoille. Kurssilla perehdytään asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteisiin ja harjoitellaan kirjoittamaan työ- ja liike-elämän kirjallisia viestejä, kuten liikekirjeitä ja muistioita. Kurssilla kerrataan ja harjoitellaan myös suomen kielen oikeinkirjoitusta.

Kurssin suoritettuaan, opiskelija:

Osoittaa perehtyneisyyttä asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteisiin.
Osaa käyttää ja soveltaa asiakirjastandardia alansa tyypillisissä kirjoitteissa.
Osaa viestiä asiatyylisesti ja vakuuttavasti ottaen huomioon vastaanottajan, tilanteen ja alan käytänteet.
Ymmärtää oikeakielisyyden merkityksen osana viestinnällistä ammattitaitoaan ja yrityksen imagoa.
Osaa arvioida ja kehittää viestintäosaamistaan.

Content (course unit)

Mitkä ovat asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteet?
Millainen on asiakirjastandardin rakenne ja mitä hyötyä sen hallitsemisesta on?
Miten laaditaan työ- ja liike-elämän yleisimmät kirjoitteet?
Mikä on kielenhuollon merkitys työelämässä?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can write business documents and messages according to given instructions and examples. He/she communicates understandably in different situations of his/her own field. The student is able to make good use of the means of communication.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student communicates fluently, understandably and interestingly in different situations of business life. He/she takes the receiver and situation into account in his/her communication. The student can interpret receiver’s action and respond to it by building collaboration e.g. in customer service situations.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student communicates in different situations of business life creatively and with great expertise. He/she is able to use the means of communication in many different ways and is able to influence by using language. The student can adjust his/her communication according to the receiver, situation, circumstances (e.g. online communication) and feedback. He/she takes his/her organisation’s values and visions into account in his/her communication.

Assessment scale

0-5

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 04.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 31.05.2024

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Mari Touronen
Person in charge

Mari Touronen

Groups
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

Kurssi on tarkoitettu IB:n suomenkielisille opiskelijoille. Kurssilla perehdytään asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteisiin ja harjoitellaan kirjoittamaan työ- ja liike-elämän kirjallisia viestejä, kuten liikekirjeitä ja muistioita. Kurssilla kerrataan ja harjoitellaan myös suomen kielen oikeinkirjoitusta.

Kurssin suoritettuaan, opiskelija:

Osoittaa perehtyneisyyttä asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteisiin.
Osaa käyttää ja soveltaa asiakirjastandardia alansa tyypillisissä kirjoitteissa.
Osaa viestiä asiatyylisesti ja vakuuttavasti ottaen huomioon vastaanottajan, tilanteen ja alan käytänteet.
Ymmärtää oikeakielisyyden merkityksen osana viestinnällistä ammattitaitoaan ja yrityksen imagoa.
Osaa arvioida ja kehittää viestintäosaamistaan.

Content (course unit)

Mitkä ovat asiatyylisen viestinnän periaatteet?
Millainen on asiakirjastandardin rakenne ja mitä hyötyä sen hallitsemisesta on?
Miten laaditaan työ- ja liike-elämän yleisimmät kirjoitteet?
Mikä on kielenhuollon merkitys työelämässä?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can write business documents and messages according to given instructions and examples. He/she communicates understandably in different situations of his/her own field. The student is able to make good use of the means of communication.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student communicates fluently, understandably and interestingly in different situations of business life. He/she takes the receiver and situation into account in his/her communication. The student can interpret receiver’s action and respond to it by building collaboration e.g. in customer service situations.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student communicates in different situations of business life creatively and with great expertise. He/she is able to use the means of communication in many different ways and is able to influence by using language. The student can adjust his/her communication according to the receiver, situation, circumstances (e.g. online communication) and feedback. He/she takes his/her organisation’s values and visions into account in his/her communication.

Assessment scale

0-5

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 10.09.2023

Timing

30.08.2023 - 23.10.2023

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Antti Vuento
  • Annikka Lepola
Person in charge

Annikka Lepola

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

In this course students operate as a management team of a global company. Management teams come up with a company strategy and make decisions to maximize the profits and company value. Company operations are carried out in a business simulation game in a competitive team environment.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:

Utilize the role of strategy as a key success factor.
Explain the interdependence between the different company operations.
Demonstrate knowledge and skills in financial review, company analysis, and strategy formulation.
Utilize tools for entrepreneurial thinking.

Content (course unit)

What is a role of a strategy to manage a company?
How does product portfolio, pricing, marketing and product features impact the demand of the product?
How to analyze company's financial performance and how to impact it?
How to work as a successful team utilizing each team players' strengths?

Further information (course unit)

There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student participates in the team work but is able to read the market and company information and utilise that data in decision making if assisted. The student struggles to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student actively participates in the teamwork and completes all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyse the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student participates actively in decision making enabling the improvement of the company status. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company's strategy and value, and answer questions related to these topics.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student actively participates in the teamwork and demonstrates a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyses the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company's strategy and the company's value. The student is able to answer various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

Assessment scale

0-5

Enrolment period

24.09.2023 - 27.10.2023

Timing

24.10.2023 - 31.12.2023

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Antti Vuento
  • Annikka Lepola
Person in charge

Syed Mubaraz

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

In this course students operate as a management team of a global company. Management teams come up with a company strategy and make decisions to maximize the profits and company value. Company operations are carried out in a business simulation game in a competitive team environment.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:

Utilize the role of strategy as a key success factor.
Explain the interdependence between the different company operations.
Demonstrate knowledge and skills in financial review, company analysis, and strategy formulation.
Utilize tools for entrepreneurial thinking.

Content (course unit)

What is a role of a strategy to manage a company?
How does product portfolio, pricing, marketing and product features impact the demand of the product?
How to analyze company's financial performance and how to impact it?
How to work as a successful team utilizing each team players' strengths?

Further information (course unit)

There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student participates in the team work but is able to read the market and company information and utilise that data in decision making if assisted. The student struggles to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student actively participates in the teamwork and completes all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyse the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student participates actively in decision making enabling the improvement of the company status. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company's strategy and value, and answer questions related to these topics.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student actively participates in the teamwork and demonstrates a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyses the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company's strategy and the company's value. The student is able to answer various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

Assessment scale

0-5

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 10.01.2024

Timing

11.01.2024 - 22.02.2024

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Katri Koli
  • Antti Vuento
Person in charge

Antti Vuento

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

In this course students operate as a management team of a global company. Management teams come up with a company strategy and make decisions to maximize the profits and company value. Company operations are carried out in a business simulation game in a competitive team environment.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:

Utilize the role of strategy as a key success factor.
Explain the interdependence between the different company operations.
Demonstrate knowledge and skills in financial review, company analysis, and strategy formulation.
Utilize tools for entrepreneurial thinking.

Content (course unit)

What is a role of a strategy to manage a company?
How does product portfolio, pricing, marketing and product features impact the demand of the product?
How to analyze company's financial performance and how to impact it?
How to work as a successful team utilizing each team players' strengths?

Further information (course unit)

There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student participates in the team work but is able to read the market and company information and utilise that data in decision making if assisted. The student struggles to see the link between the decisions in different company functions and the financial outcome.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student actively participates in the teamwork and completes all the required tasks with good quality. The student is able to analyse the market and company information in order to form a company strategy. The student participates actively in decision making enabling the improvement of the company status. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a presentation about the company's strategy and value, and answer questions related to these topics.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student actively participates in the teamwork and demonstrates a problem-solving attitude. The student successfully analyses the market and company information in order to form a rational company strategy and is able to make decisions aligned with the chosen strategy. The student understands the link between the various company functions. The student is able to give a clear and justified presentation about the company's strategy and the company's value. The student is able to answer various questions about the market situation and the company's value proposal.

Location and time

Sessions on campus according to the schedule in Pakki.

Exam schedules

No exam, grade mainly based on the game performance

Assessment methods and criteria

Main criterion: performance / ranking in the game.
Also given assignments, activity and final presentation affect the grade.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Game simulation (group work), lectures, coaching

Learning materials

Materials available in Moodle

Student workload

4 credit points (27 hours per credit point)

Content scheduling

Two practice rounds in the first session. Several actual rounds in the game after that. The schedule of the rounds will be presented during the first lecture. The course will end with the final presentation.

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Game simulation relates to a real world business case (no real company involved)

International connections

Game simulation is based on global business

Further information

N/A

Enrolment period

24.09.2023 - 23.10.2023

Timing

24.10.2023 - 31.12.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Salman Saleem
Person in charge

Salman Saleem

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This business planning course provides both basic theory and hands-on guidance to business planning. Primary objective is for students to learn the basics of business planning (1st period) and be able to create such a plan (2nd period) for a virtual company.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Understand the structure of a typical business plan
• Describe the purpose of each element of the business plan
• Apply basic business planning principles

Content (course unit)

• What are the features of a good business plan?
• How to create business plan for the virtual company?
• How to determine prices for the products and services?
• Which actions should be taken when implementing a business plan?

Prerequisites (course unit)

Business Planning 1

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can name the core elements of a business plan and a business model. The student is able to create a viable business plan including the business model. He/she is able to give and receive feedback related to business planning and collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studies related to business planning.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to explain the core elements of a business plan and the core elements of a business model. He/she can create a coherent and credible business plan including the business model. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning and take responsibility of his/her studies and group work related to business planning.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning and business models. The student is able to justify the decisions in the business plan with proper analysis and commit himself/herself to individual studies and group work related to business planning.

Location and time

Sessions will be held according to the schedule in Pakki.

Exam schedules

The final exam will be given at the last class meeting

Assessment methods and criteria

According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research

Learning materials

Required Textbook
Osterwalder, A., & Pigneur, Y. (2010). Business model generation: a handbook for visionaries, game changers, and challengers (Vol. 1). John Wiley & Sons.

Additional course material, such as blogs, videos, blogs, and short articles, will be provided in Moodle Workspace.

Student workload

According to the TAMK schedule, ECT credits, and Moodle timing instructions.
Students are expected to:
- Attend lessons
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Details are given in the first lesson

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Project work/case studies

International connections

Cases and discussion, global operational business environment, international collaborative projects.

Enrolment period

24.09.2023 - 23.10.2023

Timing

24.10.2023 - 31.12.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Salman Saleem
Person in charge

Salman Saleem

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This business planning course provides both basic theory and hands-on guidance to business planning. Primary objective is for students to learn the basics of business planning (1st period) and be able to create such a plan (2nd period) for a virtual company.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Understand the structure of a typical business plan
• Describe the purpose of each element of the business plan
• Apply basic business planning principles

Content (course unit)

• What are the features of a good business plan?
• How to create business plan for the virtual company?
• How to determine prices for the products and services?
• Which actions should be taken when implementing a business plan?

Prerequisites (course unit)

Business Planning 1

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can name the core elements of a business plan and a business model. The student is able to create a viable business plan including the business model. He/she is able to give and receive feedback related to business planning and collaborate in a small group on business planning tasks. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studies related to business planning.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to explain the core elements of a business plan and the core elements of a business model. He/she can create a coherent and credible business plan including the business model. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback related to business planning and take responsibility of his/her studies and group work related to business planning.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can use additional and recent sources to extend knowledge of business planning and business models. The student is able to justify the decisions in the business plan with proper analysis and commit himself/herself to individual studies and group work related to business planning.

Location and time

Sessions will be held according to the schedule in Pakki.

Exam schedules

The final exam will be given at the last class meeting

Assessment methods and criteria

According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research

Learning materials

Required Textbook
Osterwalder, A., & Pigneur, Y. (2010). Business model generation: a handbook for visionaries, game changers, and challengers (Vol. 1). John Wiley & Sons.

Additional course material, such as blogs, videos, blogs, and short articles, will be provided in Moodle Workspace.

Student workload

According to the TAMK schedule, ECT credits, and Moodle timing instructions.
Students are expected to:
- Attend lessons
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Details are given in the first lesson

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Project work/case studies

International connections

Cases and discussion, global operational business environment, international collaborative projects.

Enrolment period

15.08.2023 - 23.10.2023

Timing

24.10.2023 - 15.12.2023

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

Business and Media

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Kai Hintsanen
Person in charge

Kai Hintsanen

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB
  • 21IB

Objectives (course unit)

The course aims at improving the students’ understanding of conflict management, resolution and communication, in a company or organizational environment. Furthermore, crisis communication is among the essential topics of this course. There is an increasing need for settling disputes between individuals and groups of individuals, as a result of internationalization of business and a variety of financial restraints that cause tension among management and personnel of a company (internal conflict management). External conflict management deals with measures a company must take in order to control its brand, image, customer and stakeholder relations, in circumstances of uncertainties and even open conflicts. It is suitable for students who are interested in developing one’s conflict and crisis management abilities, especially in terms of communication.

After completing the course, the student will be able to:
• understand basics of conflict management and resolution in a company.
• understand crisis communication in organizational environment.

Content (course unit)

The contents include the followings:
• demonstrations, examples, creation of conflict and crisis resolution strategy/plans.
• communication rehearsals and analyses.

Prerequisites (course unit)

None.

Further information (course unit)

Implementation plan.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can name basic concepts of conflict management, change and crisis communication and the ways of influencing (lobbying). He/she is able to recognise situations where these communication skills are needed. He/she knows the significance of these in terms of advocating welfare of the organisation he/she represents. He/she is able to apply the tools and best practices in simple cases.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student can explain why conflict management, change and crisis communication, and influencing are important for any organisation. He/she has, to some extent, the ability to apply theories on them in conjunction with real life cases. He/she is able to participate in producing credible and implementable plans for situations where these are needed. The student is able to act in a sustainable way ethically in delicate conflict and crisis situations.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to take initiative in complex conflict and crisis situations, as well as in lobbying for his/her organisation. He/she is able to co-lead a group responsibly for prompt action that is often required, in terms of preventing the organisation from finding itself in a further predicament. He/she can be entrusted with the role of a spokesperson and mediator even in demanding conflict and crisis cases. He/she understands the significance of trustworthy appearance while addressing demanding cases on behalf of his/her organisation.

Location and time

Begins on Sept 1, 2021.

Exam schedules

None.

Assessment methods and criteria

Assessment will be performed on a scale 0-5.
The assignments will be graded and the average will be the final grade.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Lectures, distance learning, exercises, demonstrations, cases, videos.

Learning materials

Materials provided by the teachers in Moodle.

Student workload

Online teaching 15 hours
Exercises 30 hours
Reading the materials 40 hours
Preparing a video + handout 15 hours

Content scheduling

100% online course, doable in student's own pace.

Completion alternatives

None.

Practical training and working life cooperation

Work place cases.

International connections

International examples.

Further information

-

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student fails to submit the given assignments as required.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can name basic concepts of conflict management, change and crisis communication and the ways of influencing (lobbying). He/she is able to recognise situations where these communication skills are needed. He/she knows the significance of these in terms of advocating the welfare of the organisation he/she represents. He/she is able to apply the tools and best practices in simple cases.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can explain why conflict management, change and crisis communication, and influencing are important for any organisation. He/she has, to some extent, the ability to apply theories on them in conjunction with real-life cases. He/she is able to participate in producing credible and implementable plans for situations where these are needed. The student is able to act in a sustainable way ethically in delicate conflict and crisis situations.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to take initiative in complex conflict and crisis situations, as well as in lobbying for his/her organisation. He/she is able to co-lead the group responsibly for prompt action that is often required, in terms of preserving the organisation from winding up in a further predicament. He/she can be entrusted the role of a spokesperson and mediator even in demanding conflict and crisis cases. He/she understands the significance of trustworthy appearance while addressing demanding cases on behalf of his/her organisation.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 22.01.2024

Timing

23.01.2024 - 06.03.2024

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Kai Hintsanen
Person in charge

Kai Hintsanen

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The course aims at improving the students’ understanding of conflict management, resolution and communication, in a company or organizational environment. Furthermore, crisis communication is among the essential topics of this course. There is an increasing need for settling disputes between individuals and groups of individuals, as a result of internationalization of business and a variety of financial restraints that cause tension among management and personnel of a company (internal conflict management). External conflict management deals with measures a company must take in order to control its brand, image, customer and stakeholder relations, in circumstances of uncertainties and even open conflicts. It is suitable for students who are interested in developing one’s conflict and crisis management abilities, especially in terms of communication.

After completing the course, the student will be able to:
• understand basics of conflict management and resolution in a company.
• understand crisis communication in organizational environment.

Content (course unit)

The contents include the followings:
• demonstrations, examples, creation of conflict and crisis resolution strategy/plans.
• communication rehearsals and analyses.

Prerequisites (course unit)

None.

Further information (course unit)

Implementation plan.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can name basic concepts of conflict management, change and crisis communication and the ways of influencing (lobbying). He/she is able to recognise situations where these communication skills are needed. He/she knows the significance of these in terms of advocating welfare of the organisation he/she represents. He/she is able to apply the tools and best practices in simple cases.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student can explain why conflict management, change and crisis communication, and influencing are important for any organisation. He/she has, to some extent, the ability to apply theories on them in conjunction with real life cases. He/she is able to participate in producing credible and implementable plans for situations where these are needed. The student is able to act in a sustainable way ethically in delicate conflict and crisis situations.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to take initiative in complex conflict and crisis situations, as well as in lobbying for his/her organisation. He/she is able to co-lead a group responsibly for prompt action that is often required, in terms of preventing the organisation from finding itself in a further predicament. He/she can be entrusted with the role of a spokesperson and mediator even in demanding conflict and crisis cases. He/she understands the significance of trustworthy appearance while addressing demanding cases on behalf of his/her organisation.

Assessment scale

0-5

Enrolment period

05.06.2023 - 25.09.2023

Timing

18.09.2023 - 31.12.2023

Credits

10 op

RDI portion

10 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 40

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Katri Koli
Person in charge

Katri Koli

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

This course goes through the different steps of product or service design process in practice. It gives a good understanding of how the idea is developed into a ready product or service. The course approach is practical: teams of 3-4 students pick up project from a commissioning company/organization or start project of their own.

After completing the course, students will be able to:
• Apply the concepts and theories of product and service design into practice
• Carry out consultation projects in product and service design area
• Accomplish the project, analyze and report the results to customer
• Plan and implement a project independently and as member of a team.

Content (course unit)

How to implement product design project in practice?
How to implement service design project in practice?
How to manage the customer interface in consultation projects?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can apply the concepts and theories of product and service design into practice. He/she can carry out simple consultation projects in product and service design area. Under supervision and with the support of a mentor, the student is able to accomplish the project and report the results to the customer. He/she can support a consultation project as member of a team.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is familiar with the concepts and theories of product and service design and can utilise these concepts in a practical business case consultation project. He/she can independently and as a member of a group carry out consultation projects in the product and service design area. The student is able to plan, implement, and evaluate consultation projects and is able to report the project results to the customer. He/she can contribute to the outcomes of a consultation project as member of a team.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has in-depth understanding of the concepts and theories of product and service design and can utilise these concepts in a practical business case consultation project. He/she can independently and as a member of a group carry out consultation projects in the product and service design area, plus he/she is able to reflect on his/her own service design work progress. The student is able to plan, implement, and evaluate consultation projects and is able to report the project results to the customer. He/she can contribute and enhance the outcomes of a consultation project as member of a team. The student actively facilitates the outcome of the consultation project.

Location and time

Mondays 11-14 workshops with teacher (H4-07)
Wednesdays 11-14 time reserved for group work (to be agreed by each group separately)

First workshop on Monday 18th September (starting the work)
Last workshop on Monday 11th December (presenting the results)

Exam schedules

No exam

Assessment methods and criteria

Evaluation methods and grounds presented in the first workshop

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Workshops, Group work, Individual work, Problem-based learning

Learning materials

Project work is based on materials from Innovations and Business Management course. Additional material provided in Moodle as needed.

Student workload

Student workload 10x 27h = 270h

Workshops with teacher 12x 3h = 36h
Workshops with group (on Wednesdays) 11x 3h = 33h
Other group work and individual work 201h

Completion alternatives

-

Practical training and working life cooperation

Consultation projects are based on real-world design challenges provided by actual companies. Students are encouraged to find suitable company and challenge themselves.

International connections

Possible to collaborate with international companies

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 25.09.2023

Timing

18.09.2023 - 31.12.2023

Credits

10 op

RDI portion

10 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 40

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Jarmo Tuominiemi
Person in charge

Jarmo Tuominiemi

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

Learning outcomes of the course unit
This course will cover how innovation supports entrepreneurs through the creation of new businesses opportunities, capturing of new markets and improved organizational effectiveness. The course will focus on the role of innovation in the entrepreneurial process and how innovation can be transformed into ongoing new ventures. Innovation and entrepreneurship theories and concepts will be applied in real life business cases. The course approach is practical: teams of 3-4 students pick up a project from a commissioning company/organization or start project of their own.

After completing the course, students will be able to:
• Understand the role of innovation in the context of entrepreneurship
• Carry out consultation projects with a focus on entrepreneurship
• Accomplish the project, analyze and report the results to customer
• Plan and implement a project independently and as member of a team.

Content (course unit)

• How to utilize innovation in the context of entrepreneurship
• How to convert ideas to innovation?
• How to commercialize innovations?
• How to implement innovation management in start-up companies
• How to consult entrepreneurs on innovation

Further information (course unit)

This course will be taught in conjunction with the course “INNOVATIONS AND BUSINESS MANAGEMENT (5 credits)”

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to apply the concepts and theories of innovation into practice by carrying out simple consultation projects for startups or SME:s. Under supervision and with the support of a mentor, the student is able to accomplish the project and report the results to the customer. He/she can support a consultation project as member of a team.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is familiar with the concepts and theories of innovation and can utilize them in a practical small business case consultation project. He/she can independently and as a member of a group carry out consultation project for startups or SMEs. The student is able to plan, implement, and evaluate consultation projects and report the project results to the customer. He/she can contribute to the outcomes of a consultation project as a member of a team.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has in-depth understanding of the concepts and theories of innovation and he/she can utilise these concepts in a practical small business case consultation project. He/she can independently, or in a leading role in a team, carry out consultation projects for startups and SMEs. The student is able to plan, implement, and report the project to the customer. The student is able to reflect on his/hers own as well as team work process. He/she can facilitate, contribute and enhance the outcomes of a consultation project as a leading member of a team.

Location and time

Mondays 11-14 workshops with teacher (B3-27)
Wednesdays 11-14 time reserved for group work (to be agreed by each group separately)
First workshop on Monday 18th September (starting the work)
Last workshop on Monday 11th December (presenting the results)

Exam schedules

No Exam

Assessment methods and criteria

Evaluation methods and grounds presented in the first workshop

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Workshops, Group work, Individual work, Problem-based learning

Learning materials

Project work is based on materials from Innovations and Business Management course and additional material provided in Moodle.

Student workload

Student workload 10x 27h = 270h

Workshops with teacher 12x 3h = 36h
Workshops with group (on Wednesdays) 11x 3h = 33h
Other group work and individual work 201h

Practical training and working life cooperation

Consultation projects are based on real-world design challenges provided by actual companies. Students are encouraged to find suitable company and challenge themselves.

International connections

Possible to collaborate with international companies

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 10.01.2024

Timing

01.01.2024 - 31.07.2024

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Petteri Vilén
Person in charge

Petteri Vilén

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The course covers the basic aspects of corporate finance, the structure and functions of financial markets and elements of decision making on financial questions.
After completing the course, students will be able to:

- Compare the investment opportunities of a company and define their profitability by using alternative investment decision criteria
- Compare the alternative sources of corporate financing
- Calculate the cost of capital
- Define how risk relates to return
- Describe the structure and functions of financial markets

Content (course unit)

- How do companies compare different investment opportunities?
- What are the alternative sources of corporate financing?
- How are risk and return related?
- How is the cost of capital defined?
- What is the structure and what are the functions of financial markets?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to explain the fundamentals of corporate finance. The student recognises and is able to determine and to a certain extent use the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance. He/she can use different methods to evaluate investment opportunities and understands how risk and return are related.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student masters the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance in an excellent manner. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learned understanding of the framework of financial markets.

Location and time

TAMK kuntokatu facilities.

Exam schedules

The exam date is to be informed during the first lecture, retakes to be scheduled accordingly.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Contact teaching with exercises, individual studies and team working with assignments dedicated. The use of MyFinanceLab by Pearson is having an important role during the course.

Learning materials

Based on course materials and the book (as e-book):
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 4th or 5th ed.
J.Berk, P.DeMarzo and J. Harford. Pearson

In addition, MyFinanceLab by Pearson is to be used during the course. That includes an extensive set of practical guidance, exercises, tutorials and the e-book.

Student workload

This is a 4 cr course (4*27h), which is based on participation in lectures and assignments dedicated.

Content scheduling

There are 5 lectures and the exam, the detailed schedule is to be informed during the first class.

Completion alternatives

N/A

International connections

This is and international business finance course, a second year course as part finance module.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 09.01.2024

Timing

01.01.2024 - 31.07.2024

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Petteri Vilén
Person in charge

Petteri Vilén

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The course covers the basic aspects of corporate finance, the structure and functions of financial markets and elements of decision making on financial questions.
After completing the course, students will be able to:

- Compare the investment opportunities of a company and define their profitability by using alternative investment decision criteria
- Compare the alternative sources of corporate financing
- Calculate the cost of capital
- Define how risk relates to return
- Describe the structure and functions of financial markets

Content (course unit)

- How do companies compare different investment opportunities?
- What are the alternative sources of corporate financing?
- How are risk and return related?
- How is the cost of capital defined?
- What is the structure and what are the functions of financial markets?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to explain the fundamentals of corporate finance. The student recognises and is able to determine and to a certain extent use the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance. He/she can use different methods to evaluate investment opportunities and understands how risk and return are related.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student masters the fundamental concepts and models of corporate finance in an excellent manner. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learned understanding of the framework of financial markets.

Location and time

TAMK kuntokatu facilities.

Exam schedules

The exam date is to be informed during the first lecture, retakes to be scheduled accordingly.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Contact teaching with exercises, individual studies and team working with assignments dedicated. The use of MyFinanceLab by Pearson is having an important role during the course.

Learning materials

Based on course materials and the book (as e-book):
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 4th or 5th ed.
J.Berk, P.DeMarzo and J. Harford. Pearson

In addition, MyFinanceLab by Pearson is to be used during the course. That includes an extensive set of practical guidance, exercises, tutorials and the e-book.

Student workload

This is a 4 cr course (4*27h), which is based on participation in lectures and assignments dedicated.

Content scheduling

There are 5 lectures and the exam, the detailed schedule is to be informed during the first class.

Completion alternatives

N/A

International connections

This is and international business finance course, a second year course as part finance module.

Enrolment period

06.02.2024 - 29.04.2024

Timing

30.04.2024 - 15.05.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Jarmo Tuominiemi
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

This course is an independent continuation to the course Marketing in the Digital World. Contemporary digital marketing analytics tools are introduced in order to give the students basic skills in measuring the effectiveness of marketing actions. The students will also learn how to efficiently use information about customer needs and use experiences to develop customer relationships. It investigates the concepts of customer journey and value creation in the context of developing integrated marketing and enhancing customer experience.

After completing this course the students will be able to
• describe and use the concept of customer journey in analyzing
customer experience
• use some of the digital marketing analytics tools
• use the information to develop customer relationships and
marketing effectiveness

Content (course unit)

What is customer journey and how is it exploited in marketing planning?
What are the contents and meaning of value creation and customer experience in the context of customer relationships?
What kind of marketing analytics tools are available to measure and analyze marketing effectiveness?

Prerequisites (course unit)

Introduction to Marketing or equivalent and Marketing in the Digital World or equivalent.

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student knows the basics of customer journey and needs. The student can use the basic terms and can define customer experience. Student recognises and defines the importance of customer experience in marketing. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. Student has been partly active in participating in the teamwork.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student applies customer journey mapping methods and analytical tools accordingly. The student is able to link structures between marketing and customer experience. He/she cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student masters the concepts and models of customer experience, journey and analytics. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned customer journey analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active.

Location and time

Lessons/ workshops according to the Pakki schedule

Exam schedules

N/A

Assessment methods and criteria

According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being
See objectives in course description

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

The course consists of online lessons with supporting workshops, individual assignments, team work, and team presentations. Projects could be a continuation from Marketing in the Digital World cases.

Learning materials

- Presentation material
- Articles
- Case studies
- Videos
- Assigned E-books

Student workload

The course will be intensive. Students should be prepared for even load throughout the course.

Content scheduling

Course content will be reviewed in the first lesson module. Contact days and internal project will discuss topical digital marketing areas. External customer project will run parallel.

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Cooperation with external businesses

International connections

Some of the teams may have cases from abroad.

Further information

Students that completed 3B00DW59-3003/3004/3005 Marketing in the Digital World may attend this course.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student knows the basics of customer journey and needs. The student can use the basic terms and can define customer experience. Student recognises and defines the importance of customer experience in marketing. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. Student has been partly active in participating in the teamwork.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student applies customer journey mapping methods and analytical tools accordingly. The student is able to link structures between marketing and customer experience. He/she cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student masters the concepts and models of customer experience, journey and analytics. He/she is able to conduct fluent and reasoned customer journey analysis and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active

Enrolment period

29.08.2023 - 02.11.2023

Timing

02.11.2023 - 14.12.2023

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Juha Tuominen
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The students will learn about strategic planning in e-commerce business model. During this course the students will learn about different kinds of strategic actions and tools that can be used in e-commerce. The student will study different strategy options and make a strategic growth plan for an e-commerce business.

After completing the course student will be able to
- make a strategic growth plan for e-commerce
- understand e-commerce risks and management
- define scalability possibilities and obstacles

Content (course unit)

• How to create an e-commerce strategy?
• What does a company need for a growth strategy?
• Why strategic thinking is important?
• Core concepts of strategic management in e-commerce
• Prerequisite: Business planning 1 & 2, E-commerce and platform economy, or equivalent

Prerequisites (course unit)

Prerequisite: Business Planning 1 and 2, E-commerce and Platform Economy, or equivalent (Knowledge about digital platforms)

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to identify principles of the business strategy and strategic planning. He/she recognizes and is able to determine elements of growth strategy. The student is able to participate in a team project performing the given tasks in according to instructions.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and apply the concept and tools of the business strategy and strategic planning. He/she is able to conduct some analysis and suggest development actions suitable for the business strategy. The student actively contributes to a team project being able to receive and give constructive feedback.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student masters the concepts and different models of strategic planning and is able to connect business strategy to e-commerce strategy. He/she is able to conduct well-structured analysis and is able to create, evaluate and combine different solutions to a given e-commerce problem. The student acts in a flexible and constructive way in team projects developing the team’s interaction.

Location and time

Blended learning appropach. Sessions will be held according to the schedule in Pakki. The first session will be held on campus.

Exam schedules

Details given in the first class session

Assessment methods and criteria

Pair task. Evaluation based on the criteria.

According to TAMK evaluation criteria (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research
- On-campus and online sessions

Learning materials

- Presentations
- Case studies
- Videos
- Additional resources will be shared in the first session

Student workload

According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions.
Students are expected to:
- Attend sessions
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Complete the final report and exam
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Details given in the fiirst class session.

Completion alternatives

None

Practical training and working life cooperation

Cooperation with external businesses

International connections

Case studies

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Not returning the given tasks on time.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Grade 1-2
The student is able to identify principles of the business strategy and strategic planning. He/she recognizes and is able to determine elements of growth strategy. The student is able to participate in a team project performing the given tasks in according to instructions.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Grade 3-4
The student is able to determine and apply the concept and tools of the business strategy and strategic planning. He/she is able to conduct some analysis and suggest development actions suitable for the business strategy. The student actively contributes to a team project being able to receive and give constructive feedback

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Grade 5
The student masters the concepts and different models of strategic planning and is able to connect business strategy to e-commerce strategy. He/she is able to conduct well-structured analysis and is able to create, evaluate and combine different solutions to a given e-commerce problem. The student acts in a flexible and constructive way in team projects developing the team’s interaction.

Enrolment period

08.06.2023 - 31.08.2023

Timing

31.08.2023 - 05.10.2023

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Juha Tuominen
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

This course covers the basics of e-commerce and platform economy. The students are introduced to the theories of platform economy through variety of case studies and business examples. E-commerce ecosystems are studied and network theories applied to e-commerce ecosystems.
After completing the course student will be able to
- describe the theories of platform economy
- understand the different revenue logics in e-commerce
- define different networks, actors and interactions in ecosystem
- build a platform economy based business model

Content (course unit)

• Network effects
• Digital platforms
• Knowing, understanding and applying digital technologies
• Building e-commerce
• Business Model Canvas
• Prerequisite: Business planning 1 and 2 or equivalent

Prerequisites (course unit)

Prerequisite: Business Planning 1 and 2 or equivalent

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student knows the basics of e-commerce and platform economy. He/she can use the basic terms and can define e-commerce. The student recognises and defines different theories in ecosystems and e-commerce business models. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. He/she has been partly active in participating the teamwork according to the peer evaluation.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has achieved the course objectives well, but needs further development. He/she can apply theories accordingly. The student is able to structure between business models and earning logic. The student cooperates responsibly and has participated in the team work and classes actively contributing the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has achieved the course objectives excellently. He/she masters the concepts and models of platform economy, business models and revenue models. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned e-commerce business model and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active.

Location and time

Blended learning. Meeting times are as scheduled in Pakki. The first class meeting will take place on campus.

Exam schedules

Details given in the first meeting

Assessment methods and criteria

According to TAMK evaluation criteria (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Blended studies approach for the course.
Tasks: mini exams, learning diary and an essay.

- Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research

Learning materials

- Presentation material
- Assigned books
- Articles and case studies
- Video

Student workload

5 credits = 135 hours

Content scheduling

5 content modules that unlock weekly. Details discussed in the first meeting

Completion alternatives

N/A

International connections

International case studies

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student knows the basics of e-commerce and platform economy. He/she can use the basic terms and can define e-commerce. The student recognises and defines different theories in ecosystems and e-commerce business models. The student can perform the given tasks with routine performance. He/she has been partly active in participating the teamwork according to the peer evaluation.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student has achieved the course objectives well, but needs further development. He/she can apply theories accordingly. The student is able to structure between business models and earning logic. The student cooperates responsibly and has participated in the teamwork and classes actively, while contributing to the final outcome with his/her knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student has achieved the course objectives excellently. He/she masters the concepts and models of platform economy, business models and revenue models. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned e-commerce business model and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active.

Enrolment period

06.02.2024 - 06.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 30.04.2024

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sami Kalliokoski
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

This course provides students with a brief introduction on logistics and supply chain management. It identifies the major supply chain issues in the humanitarian sector, particularly as they relate to the emergencies and also reveals the need for cross-learning between the business and the humanitarian sector.

After completing the course, students will be able to:

Understand the characteristics of a humanitarian supply chain management speed.
Understand Humanitarian and emergency cycle
Analys the Logistics cases from the ground: Red-Cross, DHL, NESA
Understand the coordination and complexity in humanitarian SCM.

Content (course unit)

Logistics of humanitarian aid
Preparedness
Coordination
Building a successfull partnership ( Private: TNT-WFP case)
Reading materials and articles.

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in emergency supply chain management.
He/she has the basic understanding of humanitarian logistics in general. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in emergency supply chain. He/she can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of humanitarian logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. He/she contributes to the tasks and assignments during the course.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in emergency supply chain.
He/she has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of humanitarian logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants of the group. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course.

Location and time

From Lukkari

Exam schedules

Informed via Moodle

Assessment methods and criteria

Group assignment and activeness

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Online teaching

Learning materials

Book and ebook:
Humanitarian Logistics, Tomasini Rolando etc.

Material from Moodle

Student workload

N.A.

Content scheduling

N.A.

Completion alternatives

N.A.

Practical training and working life cooperation

N.A.

International connections

N.A.

Further information

N.A.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in emergency supply chain management.
He/she has the basic understanding of humanitarian logistics in general. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in emergency supply chain. He/she can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of humanitarian logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. He/she contributes to the tasks and assignments during the course.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in emergency supply chain.
He/she has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of humanitarian logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants of the group. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course.

Enrolment period

06.02.2024 - 11.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 07.05.2024

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Lasse Hillman
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

This course covers the primary ideas of Enterprise Resource Planning systems (ERP). The course focuses on SAP-system (integrated modules) from logistics point of view. It explores integration between the Transportation Management Systems (TMS) and Warehouse Management Systems (WMS). More information is available at www.logivo.fi.

After completing the course, students will be able to:

Define the business process model and ERP selection criterias.
Describe what enterprise resource planning (ERP) means.
Support ERP project implementations.
Navigate in SAP R/3 and Business One environment.
Work in details with the SAP AIO module (sales and distribution, Material Management,).
Act as a SAP user: Master data, material data.
Plan the first phases in SAP customizing.

Content (course unit)

Introduction to ERP systems
Navigation in SAP AIO
SAP AIO without WMS
SAP AIO with WMS in partnership with guest lecturer from Belgium
ERP implementation project as a cmpany based assignment
SAP customizing.

Prerequisites (course unit)

-The Basics of logistics is a prerequisite to this course

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student knows what ERPs are, what they are used for and why. He/she recognises all the relevant organisational resources, their nature and requirements. The student is able to define the main ERP (SAP R/3 / Business One) modules and the ERP’s functional structure and how each module acquires information / contributes to other modules. The student recognises the architecture of an ERP (SAP) from user perspective regarding master and material data and is able to conduct routine operations with them. The student has also a basic understanding about organisational requirements and lifecycle stages of an ERP project.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to explain an organisation’s business processes, especially on sales, distribution and material management with great clarity. The student has good understanding of the organisation’s value chain from raw materials to finished products and he/she is capable of applying this data within ERP. He/she has good oversight over stakeholder contacts and is able to manage the organisation’s ERP master data and, with some effort, manage stakeholder contacts and all data regarding materials, the organisation procures, produces, or keeps in stock. The student also knows which stakeholders and offerings are connected with which business processes in a given situation and he/she is capable of managing this business information with the support of ERP in daily business.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can benchmark various ERPs from the organisation’s perspective and recognise beneficiary and disadvantageous elements for the organisation. He/she can recommend the best ERP for the organisation. The student has excellent understanding over the various resource types and he/she is able to use ERP system in automating and managing the variety of back and front office functions and their sub-stages. The student can recognise possible bottlenecks in the ERP environment and is able to customise the ERP user interface and improve its usage efficiency, especially regarding the sales and distribution (SD) module. The student has fair understanding over the functionality of other ERP modules such as financials and controlling (FICO), human resources (HR), materials management (MM) and production planning (PP).

Location and time

On campus and according to the timetable in Pakki.

Exam schedules

N/A

Assessment methods and criteria

The course will consist of two separate parts: ERP general and SAP specic parts. In order to pass the course, both parts have to be accepted.
1. ERP generic part will be evaluated on scale 0-5 by the teacher of that part
2. SAP part will be evaluated by teacher of that part as pass / fail

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped class sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Remote and/or on-campus lab workshops
- Project-based learning

Learning materials

- Presentation material
- Assigned books
- Articles and case studies
- Video

Student workload

Students are expected to:
- Attend sessions
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Complete the final report and SAP exercises
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Themes will be reviewed in the first lesson

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Hands-on approach with SAP and chosen tool in the class project

International connections

N/A

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

If either part of the course is evaluated as FAIL, the whole course will fail.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student knows what ERPs are, what they are used for and why. He/she recognises all the relevant organisational resources, their nature and requirements. The student is able to define the main ERP (SAP R/3 / Business One) modules and the ERP’s functional structure and how each module acquires information / contributes to other modules. The student recognises the architecture of an ERP (SAP) from user perspective regarding master and material data and is able to conduct routine operations with them. The student has also a basic understanding about organisational requirements and lifecycle stages of an ERP project.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to explain an organisation’s business processes, especially on sales, distribution and material management with great clarity. The student has good understanding of the organisation’s value chain from raw materials to finished products and he/she is capable of applying this data within ERP. He/she has good oversight over stakeholder contacts and is able to manage the organisation’s ERP master data and, with some effort, manage stakeholder contacts and all data regarding materials, the organisation procures, produces, or keeps in stock. The student also knows which stakeholders and offerings are connected with which business processes in a given situation and he/she is capable of managing this business information with the support of ERP in daily business.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can benchmark various ERPs from the organisation’s perspective and recognise beneficiary and disadvantageous elements for the organisation. He/she can recommend the best ERP for the organisation. The student has excellent understanding over the various resource types and he/she is able to use ERP system in automating and managing the variety of back and front office functions and their sub-stages. The student can recognise possible bottlenecks in the ERP environment and is able to customise the ERP user interface and improve its usage efficiency, especially regarding the sales and distribution (SD) module. The student has fair understanding over the functionality of other ERP modules such as financials and controlling (FICO), human resources (HR), materials management (MM) and production planning (PP).

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 15.09.2023

Timing

18.09.2023 - 30.11.2023

Credits

5 op

Virtual portion

1 op

Mode of delivery

80 % Contact teaching, 20 % Distance learning

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 40

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sari Matala
Person in charge

Sari Matala

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

Experience Economy and Product Development course is introducing the nature of experience economy and it is focused on practical designing and analyzing experience products in tourism business. Students learn the special characteristics of products and services within tourism industry. Product design model for practical product development is studied.

After completing the course students are able to:

Understand the nature of product development in tourism business
Apply the experience product design tools in product development process
Analyze the existing products and to improve the quality of experience products

Content (course unit)

Which are the characteristics of tourism products and services?

How to apply experience design tools in tourism product development in practice?
How to analyze the existing experience products and how to improve them?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student recognises the specific nature of product development in experience / tourism business. He/she is able to explain the process of tourism product development using design tools. The student is able to participate in analysing and improving tasks of existing experience products in a team, taking responsibility of his/her own performance.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student can clearly explain various aspects of the nature of product development in experience / tourism business. The student is able to do basic product analysis and apply a product design tool in the context of the experience / tourism business. The student participates actively and responsibly in the teamwork taking responsibility of team performance. The student is capable of receiving and giving feedback actively and constructively.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to analyse thoroughly an existing experience product and to find and evaluate different tools appropriate for the problem at hand. He/she is able to apply the design tools in product development taking into account the specific business needs and develop highly original or innovative ideas. The student takes a leading role in a team, working in a responsible, flexible and constructive way developing the group's interaction.

Location and time

See Moodle course

Exam schedules

No exam, team presentation to be assessed

Assessment methods and criteria

Team presentation as an otcome of the course. See assessment criteria.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

The course is an advanced course about experience economy, as it continues the 1st year's Introduction to Experience Economy. Now the focus is put into concrete application of the lessons learned - experience economy thinking & doing - in authentic product development work. The students learn about the characteristics of experiential products and services, the most applicable and relevant practical experience design tools, and they get to both analyze existing / possible experience products and services - but also learn to improve them in practice.
The course includes a practical product development project to be completed in small teams. Also, the course is based on teacher driven f2f and online sessions, individual reading and material search, and team work for discussions and the main assignment, presenting a project task outcome.

Learning materials

See Moodle page for the most relevant material on experience economy. Also additional inspirational material will be given. It is recommended that the student also acquires own suitable material for one's own learning and the task at hand.

Student workload

5 ECTS equals 135 hours of student work. The work load is divided between teacher driven sessions as well as group and individual work , individual reading tasks and material search.

The student selects a case as a small group to be analyzed/developed applying experience Pyramid model in practice, most likely the case is agreed with a commissioner company or community by the teacher.

Content scheduling

See Moodle course

Completion alternatives

No alternative means of completion.

Practical training and working life cooperation

Teams are recommended to contact their possible project commissioners

International connections

International student teams and project commissioners possible

Further information

Passing the course requires active team working and submitting tasks in time. NOTE: team outcome, presentation, is to be assessed. Team members receive the same grade.

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

No participating in team working, tasks are not submitted or are submitted very late in Moodle, task description is not followed, no applying academic literature.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Participating team working is poor/superficial. Student is able to produce text, but there are hardly any academic references. Experience Economy is not understood/identified completely. Lack/mistakes in applying and justifying (tourist segment and profile, business environment, trends/values/society etc.) Experience Pyramid (elements and levels) in case X. No original or innovative ideas presented. Lack in presentation contents (essential contents) in logic order. No company co-operation exists or it is very superficial.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Participating team working is active. Student is able to produce text with several academic references. Experience Economy is understood/identified. Applying and justifying (tourist segment and profile, business environment, trends/values/society etc.) Experience Pyramid (elements and levels) in case X is mostly covered. Original or innovative ideas presented. Presentation contents (essential contents) in logic order is on a good level. Company co-operation clearly exists.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Participating team working is very active. Student is able to produce text with variety of academic references. Experience Economy is understood/identified analytically. Applying and justifying (tourist segment and profile, business environment, trends/values/society etc.) Experience Pyramid (elements and levels) in case X is applied on a professional way. Highly original, innovative and unique ideas are presented and justified. Presentation contents (essential contents) in logic order is on an excellent level. Company co-operation is clearly active.

Enrolment period

24.09.2023 - 23.10.2023

Timing

24.10.2023 - 12.12.2023

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

Business and Media

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Petteri Vilén
Person in charge

Petteri Vilén

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

The course presents the common financial practices when setting up a company, planning business profitability and working capital needs. The approach is practical with case studies.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Adopt the key elements for stable financial position of a company
• Estimate and simulate profitability, Cost-Volume-Profit analysis
• Prepare relevant financial projections for starting a company, budgeting
• Set the needs for working capital
• Attach financial plans, as part of business plan

Content (course unit)

• What are the factors of profitable business?
• How to make company profit and loss budget?
• How to estimate cash flow needs?
• How to simulate and improve company profitability?
• What are the local aspects of company financials?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student recognizes the role and meaning of management accounting in a company. He/she understands the relevant managerial accounting principles and practices used by companies. The student is able to define the importance of the financial planning process and name the important fields within management accounting. The student identifies typical management accounting tools and methods in use; he/she can make basic financial plans and managerial calculations and solve accounting cases by making simple calculations. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility as an individual learner. The student can act as part of a team.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student connects the role of management accounting in company operations. He/she structures the course themes with financial accounting by applying the tools and concepts used by companies. He/she explains why and how to use various management accounting methods for targeting profitable business. The student makes simple profitability calculations with simulation analysis and company's financial projections by applying the meaning of margin. The student makes relevant financial comparisons for management decisions and simulates outcome with various accounting factors. The student gives and receives constructive feedback; he/she is able to operate in professional manner by recognising relevant scope and needs. He develops his interaction skills by adding value to the team.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student adapts the course themes at advanced level. He finds and translates the course themes with working life connections. He expands the context by bringing new perspectives, he analyses the selected management accounting methods. The student adopts the financial mindset, with academic perspective. The student builds creative solutions by combining various course themes. He/she evaluates the outcomes and looks for new opportunities. He/she can justify the decisions made by using the calculations presented. The student aims for alternative perspectives; he/she brings maturity and applies relevant details as needed. The student uses the feedback and iterates his learning process. He/she adds collaboration by being an asset for the team. The student develops creative and constructive working methods by bringing professional commitment throughout the course.

Location and time

TAMK premises, Kuntokatu

Exam schedules

The exam and its details are to be informed in the beginning of the course.

Assessment methods and criteria

The course evaluation is based on the exam, based on generic TAMK criteria and requirements

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Contact teaching and exercises

Learning materials

Instructed by the lecturer during the course

Student workload

Totally 3 credits (3* 27 hours), consisting of lectures, exercises and dedicated course assignments and the exam.

Content scheduling

There are 5*lectures, the schedule is to be informed in the beginning of semester

Completion alternatives

The exam, no other options

International connections

This is an IB course, with international students. The course is in english.

Enrolment period

24.09.2023 - 23.10.2023

Timing

24.10.2023 - 12.12.2023

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

Business and Media

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Petteri Vilén
Person in charge

Petteri Vilén

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

The course presents the common financial practices when setting up a company, planning business profitability and working capital needs. The approach is practical with case studies.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Adopt the key elements for stable financial position of a company
• Estimate and simulate profitability, Cost-Volume-Profit analysis
• Prepare relevant financial projections for starting a company, budgeting
• Set the needs for working capital
• Attach financial plans, as part of business plan

Content (course unit)

• What are the factors of profitable business?
• How to make company profit and loss budget?
• How to estimate cash flow needs?
• How to simulate and improve company profitability?
• What are the local aspects of company financials?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student recognizes the role and meaning of management accounting in a company. He/she understands the relevant managerial accounting principles and practices used by companies. The student is able to define the importance of the financial planning process and name the important fields within management accounting. The student identifies typical management accounting tools and methods in use; he/she can make basic financial plans and managerial calculations and solve accounting cases by making simple calculations. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility as an individual learner. The student can act as part of a team.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student connects the role of management accounting in company operations. He/she structures the course themes with financial accounting by applying the tools and concepts used by companies. He/she explains why and how to use various management accounting methods for targeting profitable business. The student makes simple profitability calculations with simulation analysis and company's financial projections by applying the meaning of margin. The student makes relevant financial comparisons for management decisions and simulates outcome with various accounting factors. The student gives and receives constructive feedback; he/she is able to operate in professional manner by recognising relevant scope and needs. He develops his interaction skills by adding value to the team.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student adapts the course themes at advanced level. He finds and translates the course themes with working life connections. He expands the context by bringing new perspectives, he analyses the selected management accounting methods. The student adopts the financial mindset, with academic perspective. The student builds creative solutions by combining various course themes. He/she evaluates the outcomes and looks for new opportunities. He/she can justify the decisions made by using the calculations presented. The student aims for alternative perspectives; he/she brings maturity and applies relevant details as needed. The student uses the feedback and iterates his learning process. He/she adds collaboration by being an asset for the team. The student develops creative and constructive working methods by bringing professional commitment throughout the course.

Location and time

TAMK premises, Kuntokatu

Exam schedules

The exam and its details are to be informed in the beginning of the course.

Assessment methods and criteria

The course evaluation is based on the exam, based on generic TAMK criteria and requirements

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Contact teaching and exercises

Learning materials

Instructed by the lecturer during the course

Student workload

Totally 3 credits (3* 27 hours), consisting of lectures, exercises and dedicated course assignments and the exam.

Content scheduling

There are 5*lectures, the schedule is to be informed in the beginning of semester

Completion alternatives

The exam, no other options

International connections

This is an IB course, with international students. The course is in english.

Enrolment period

06.02.2024 - 06.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 30.04.2024

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Pia Lamminsivu
Person in charge

Pia Lamminsivu

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

During the course students will continue bookkeeping in virtual companies. At the end of the course they will prepare the financial statements.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Record basic business transactions in accounting
• Prepare income statement and balance sheet for a small firm

Content (course unit)

• How are business transactions recorded in accounting?
• How are financial statements prepared?
• What do annual reports include?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can recognise and define fundamentals of financial accounting, income statement and balance sheet. The student knows the basic functions of bookkeeping software. The student can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work in individual and team assignments.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting. He/she knows how income statement and balance sheet are prepared. The student can use bookkeeping software at a basic level. The student takes responsibility and commits to group activities in addition to his/her own work.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting and financial statements in an excellent manner. The student is able to analyse financial statements and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student can use bookkeeping software well at a basic level. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

Location and time

Weeks 10-17/2024

Exam schedules

Course exam in April 2024
First retake exam in May,2024
Second retake exam in September, 2024

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- lectures
- assignments
- teamwork
- bookkeeping and financial statements of practice firm

Learning materials

- Recommended reading will be listed in course Moodle
- Lecture material and assignments will be available in course Moodle

Student workload

2 ECTS = 54 hours

Completion alternatives

--

Enrolment period

06.02.2024 - 06.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 26.04.2024

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Pia Lamminsivu
Person in charge

Pia Lamminsivu

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

During the course students will continue bookkeeping in virtual companies. At the end of the course they will prepare the financial statements.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Record basic business transactions in accounting
• Prepare income statement and balance sheet for a small firm

Content (course unit)

• How are business transactions recorded in accounting?
• How are financial statements prepared?
• What do annual reports include?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can recognise and define fundamentals of financial accounting, income statement and balance sheet. The student knows the basic functions of bookkeeping software. The student can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work in individual and team assignments.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and apply the fundamental concepts of financial accounting. He/she knows how income statement and balance sheet are prepared. The student can use bookkeeping software at a basic level. The student takes responsibility and commits to group activities in addition to his/her own work.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student masters the fundamental concepts of financial accounting and financial statements in an excellent manner. The student is able to analyse financial statements and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student can use bookkeeping software well at a basic level. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

Location and time

Weeks 10-17/2024

Exam schedules

Course exam in April 2024
First retake exam in May,2024
Second retake exam in September, 2024

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- lectures
- assignments
- teamwork
- bookkeeping and financial statements of practice firm

Learning materials

- Recommended reading will be listed in course Moodle
- Lecture material and assignments will be available in course Moodle

Student workload

2 ECTS = 54 hours

Completion alternatives

--

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 05.09.2023

Timing

30.08.2023 - 13.12.2023

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Terhi Tapaninen
Person in charge

Terhi Tapaninen

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

The course provides the basics of the Finnish language (estimated level A1.2)

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• pronounce Finnish quite correctly
• understand and use short and simply structured expressions that concern basic
situations related to everyday life (introducing oneself and one’s family, simple shopping and food)
• learn to build up their vocabulary
• learn to use the basic structure of Finnish
• know, use and understand simple spoken and written expressions connected to
everyday life.

Content (course unit)

• study book Suomen mestari 1, chapters 1–4, 8:
o pronunciation exercises
o vocabulary exercises
o structural exercises
o conversational and drama exercises
o listening comprehension exercises
o reading comprehension exercises
o written exercises.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. They can exchange greetings/farewells, introduce oneself and name a few objects. It is hard for them to attend a simple conversation or create a short text. Their pronunciation causes difficulties to understand meanings of produced speech.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. Students have an active attitude towards studying Finnish language showing that by completing tasks according to the schedule. They are able to cope in the most common simple everyday situations. Students can use typical grammatical structures e.g. basic verb conjugation, possessive structure and partitive in simple sentences. They can write brief texts and pronounce Finnish quite clearly.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. They have a positive and active attitude towards learning language. They can pronounce Finnish distinctively and are able to use suitable and varied expressions in everyday situations using grammar almost correctly. Students can participate in a conversation asking and responding to questions about topics studied in the course. They can write simple texts and recombine words and phrases into new sentences.

Location and time

Zoom (till the end of September). From October onwards contact classes.

Exam schedules

Mid-term exam Wednesday, October 11th 2023
Final exam Friday, December 8th 2023

Assessment methods and criteria

Continuous assessment based on classwork (activity, presence, completed exercises). To pass the course, active attendance is required.

Course grade consists of four parts:
A Mid course written exam (listening comprehension + reading comprehension + writing + structure tasks)
B Oral exam in small groups
C Final exam (listening comprehension + reading comprehension + writing + structure tasks)
D Class activity
Strong class activity can raise course grade and is expected for grade 5.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Thia course is aimed specially for those students who haven´t been able to arrive in Finland at the beginning of their studies. Thus we will start the course online. We´re practising communication, so cameras on if you star on Zoom! Course platform used is Moodle. Later (at the beginning of October) when everyone/most of the students are in Tampere we will move to contact tuition at the campus.
The course consists of various excercises and concentrates on everyday communication. Methods:
o pronunciation exercises
o vocabulary exercises
o structural exercises
o conversational and drama exercises
o listening comprehension exercises
o reading comprehension exercises
o written exercises.the end of the course, we will have an exam in oral and written skills.

Learning materials

Coursebook Suomen mestari 1 uudistettu (=renewed edition), chapters 1-4 +8 and teacher's materials.

Student workload

Group meetings twice a week (2x90 minutes/week), attendance required. A regular and active attendance in lessons is important and also compulsory to pass the course. In addition, much private learning is needed. 5 ECTs course means 5 x 27 hours of work! To build up one's motivation is very important: to find useful, fun and creative ways to learn, use and understand Finnish. So have Finnish as a hobby also in your free time!
Homework: 6-8 hours per week (may vary individually) and active attitude towards Finnish-speaking society.

Content scheduling

Basic information of Finnish language, pronunciation, vocabulary and phrases, greetings, numbers, time expressions, positive and negative verb conjugation, verb types, question sentences, introducing yourself, telling about your everyday life, simple everyday conversations, shopping

Completion alternatives

Not available

Practical training and working life cooperation

Not available.

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Uncompleted assignments, great difficulties to understand and produce the simplest basic phrases and expressions. Absences from lessons.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably. They can exchange greetings/farewells, introduce oneself, name a few objects and copy some words that she/he has learned. It is hard for them to attend a simple conversation or create a short text. Their pronunciation causes difficulties to understand meanings of produced speech.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student has an active attitude towards studying Finnish language showing that by completing course tasks according to the schedule. They attend the classes regularly. They are able to cope in most common everyday situations: shopping and meeting people. The student able to write brief texts (e.g. e-mail, text message, and post card) and can pronounce Finnish clearly enough. Students' mother tongue may have an effect in pronunciation and/or sentence structure, but it doesn’t cause big problems to understand the meaning of messages.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student has a positive and active attitude towards learning Finnish and is genuinely interested in Finnish culture, and brings it up by comparing Finnish culture to his/her own. They have attended the course regularly (80% of the classes). They can pronounce Finnish distinctively and is able to use suitable and varied expressions in everyday situations using grammar almost correctly. The student is able to write brief texts in Finnish, which are mostly correct.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 10.09.2023

Timing

30.08.2023 - 13.12.2023

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 40

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Maiju Paldán
Person in charge

Maiju Paldán

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

The course provides the basics of the Finnish language (estimated level A1.2)

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• pronounce Finnish quite correctly
• understand and use short and simply structured expressions that concern basic
situations related to everyday life (introducing oneself and one’s family, simple shopping and food)
• learn to build up their vocabulary
• learn to use the basic structure of Finnish
• know, use and understand simple spoken and written expressions connected to
everyday life.

Content (course unit)

• study book Suomen mestari 1, chapters 1–4, 8:
o pronunciation exercises
o vocabulary exercises
o structural exercises
o conversational and drama exercises
o listening comprehension exercises
o reading comprehension exercises
o written exercises.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. They can exchange greetings/farewells, introduce oneself and name a few objects. It is hard for them to attend a simple conversation or create a short text. Their pronunciation causes difficulties to understand meanings of produced speech.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. Students have an active attitude towards studying Finnish language showing that by completing tasks according to the schedule. They are able to cope in the most common simple everyday situations. Students can use typical grammatical structures e.g. basic verb conjugation, possessive structure and partitive in simple sentences. They can write brief texts and pronounce Finnish quite clearly.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. They have a positive and active attitude towards learning language. They can pronounce Finnish distinctively and are able to use suitable and varied expressions in everyday situations using grammar almost correctly. Students can participate in a conversation asking and responding to questions about topics studied in the course. They can write simple texts and recombine words and phrases into new sentences.

Location and time

The course meetings will take place in TAMK on Wednesdays and Friday at 9.30-11.00 AM. The meeting places will be added in the calendar in the beginning of the autumn.

Exam schedules

The final exam will take place on the 13th of December.

The renewal exams will be held in the winter 2024.

Assessment methods and criteria

- The final exam (weight 75 %)
* listening and grammar exercises
* evaluation basis: exam points
- The course assignments and general course work (25 %)
* evaluation basis: active participation in the course meetings and success in the course assignments

Additionally, you are required to attend 80 % of the course meeting time to pass the course.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Classroom meetings.
- Independent work.
- Course assignments.
- Final exam.

Learning materials

- the study book (Suomen mestari 1, chapters 1-4)
- material from the teacher

Student workload

- 2 x 1,5 h of classroom work in a week
- 1,5-3 h of independent work in a week

Content scheduling

We will discuss this in the beginning of the course.

Completion alternatives

Not available.

Practical training and working life cooperation

Not available.

International connections

Not available.

Further information

If you are not certain if this is the right course for you, please, contact the Finnish language counsellor Ella Hakala (ella.hakala@tuni.fi).

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student can fail the course for one or both of the following reasons:
- Student receives less than 38 % of the maximum points in the final exam, and can not compensate for the exam result with the overall course work.
- Student misses more than 20 % of the classroom time (either by being absent or unavailable in the classroom meetings).

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Grade 1 in the final exam:
- 38-49 % of the maximum points

Grade 2 in the final exam:
- 50-61 % of the maximum points

Grade 1 criteria for overall work:
Student
- has at least a rudimentary participation in the course work
- shows recurring inability to take part in the general classroom discussions
- keeps submitting assignments after deadline
- has missing assignments and/or a low performance in the course assignments
- meets the attendance requirement

Grade 2 criteria for overall work:
Student
- has at least a rudimentary participation in the course work
- shows occasional inability to take part in the general classroom discussions
- submits the course assignments on time
- has a low performance in the course assignments
- meets the attendance requirement

Your final grade will depend on your exam results and overall course work. For example, if your final exam grade is somewhere between 1 and 2, your overall work in the course can determine whether your final grade is 1 or 2.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Grade 3 in the final exam:
- 62-76 % of the maximum points

Grade 4 in the final exam:
- 77-88 % of the maximum points

Grade 3 criteria for overall work:
Student
- has mostly an active and focused participation in the course work
- is able to take part in the general classroom discussions when needed but might struggle with individual topics
- submits the course assignments on time
- has a solid performance in the course assignments
- meets the attendance requirements

Grade 4 criteria for overall work:
Student
- has an active and focused participation in the course work
- is able to take part in the general classroom discussions when needed
- submits the course assignments on time
- has a great performance in the course assignments
- meets the attendance requirements

Your final grade will depend on your exam results and overall course work. For example, if your final exam grade is somewhere between 3 and 4, your overall work in the course can determine whether your final grade is 3 or 4.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The grade 5 in the final exam:
- 89-100 % success in the final exams

Grade 5 criteria for the overall work:
Student
- has active and focused participation in the course work
- is able to take part in the general classroom discussions when needed
- submits the course assignments on time
- has a great or excellent performance in the course assignments
- meets the attendance requirements

Your final grade will depend on your exam results and overall course work. For example, if your final exam grade is somewhere between 4 and 5, your overall work in the course can determine whether your final grade is 4 or 5.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 10.09.2023

Timing

30.08.2023 - 13.12.2023

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Maiju Paldán
Person in charge

Maiju Paldán

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 22IB
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

The course provides the basics of the Finnish language (estimated level A2.1) building up the knowledge and use of Finnish language in simple everyday situations.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• pronounce Finnish quite well
• understand phrases and the highest frequency vocabulary related to areas of most immediate personal relevance (e.g. very basic personal and family information, shopping, local area)
• catch the main point in short, clear, simple messages and announcements
• read very short, simple texts
• find specific, predictable information in simple everyday material such as
advertisements, prospectuses, menus and timetables and understand short simple
personal letters
• participate in a conversation asking and responding to questions about topics studied in
the course
• use their Finnish out of a classroom
• use a series of phrases and sentences to describe in simple terms their family and other
people, living conditions, educational background and their present or most recent job
• write short, simple texts related to everyday topics.

Content (course unit)

• study book Suomen mestari 1, chapters 5 - 7 and 9, moreover free time, health, past
tenses, passive voice

o structural exercises
o pronunciation exercises
o vocabulary exercises
o conversational and drama exercises
o listening comprehension exercises
o reading comprehension exercises
o written exercises.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. They can tell about few of the achieved course contents, but their expression stays limited: both spoken and written language is partly hard to understand. It is difficult for them to take part to a simple discussion. Also their incomplete pronunciation may cause difficulties to understand their speech.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. Students have an active attitude towards studying Finnish language showing that by completing course tasks according to the schedule. They are able to cope in everyday conversations related to topics studied in the course. Students can write short texts about their home, travelling or work. They can pronounce Finnish clearly enough. Students are able to use typical grammatic structures e.g. local cases and past tenses in simple sentences.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. Students have a positive and active attitude towards learning language. They can pronounce Finnish distinctively. They manage quite well in everyday conversations related to topics studied in the course. They can write simple texts quite correctly and recombine words and phrases into new sentences so that used typical grammatic structures are almost correct. They understand the importance of good Finnish language skills to get a job in Finland.

Location and time

The course meetings will take place in TAMK on Wednesdays and Friday at 2.15-3.45 PM. The meeting places will be added in the calendar in the beginning of the autumn.

Exam schedules

The final exam will take place on the 13th of December.

The renewal exams will be held in the winter 2024.

Assessment methods and criteria

- The final exam (weight 75 %)
* listening and grammar exercises
* evaluation basis: exam points
- The course assignments and general course work (25 %)
* evaluation basis: active participation in the course meetings and success in the course assignments

Additionally, you are required to attend 80 % of the course meeting time to pass the course.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Classroom meetings.
- Independent work.
- Course assignments.
- Final exam.

Learning materials

- the study book (Suomen mestari 1, chapters 5-9)
- material from the teacher

Student workload

- 2 x 1,5 h of classroom work in a week
- 1,5-3 h of independent work in a week

Content scheduling

We will discuss this in the beginning of the course.

Completion alternatives

Not available.

Practical training and working life cooperation

Not available.

International connections

Not available.

Further information

If you are not certain if this is the right course for you, please, contact the Finnish language counsellor Ella Hakala (ella.hakala@tuni.fi).

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student can fail the course for one or both of the following reasons:
- Student receives less than 38 % of the maximum points in the final exam, and can not compensate for the exam result with the overall course work.
- Student misses more than 20 % of the classroom time (either by being absent or unavailable in the classroom meetings).

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Grade 1 in the final exam:
- 38-49 % of the maximum points

Grade 2 in the final exam:
- 50-61 % of the maximum points

Grade 1 criteria for overall work:
Student
- has at least a rudimentary participation in the course work
- shows recurring inability to take part in the general classroom discussions
- keeps submitting assignments after deadline
- has missing assignments and/or a low performance in the course assignments
- meets the attendance requirement

Grade 2 criteria for overall work:
Student
- has at least a rudimentary participation in the course work
- shows occasional inability to take part in the general classroom discussions
- submits the course assignments on time
- has a low performance in the course assignments
- meets the attendance requirement

Your final grade will depend on your exam results and overall course work. For example, if your final exam grade is somewhere between 1 and 2, your overall work in the course can determine whether your final grade is 1 or 2.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Grade 3 in the final exam:
- 62-76 % of the maximum points

Grade 4 in the final exam:
- 77-88 % of the maximum points

Grade 3 criteria for overall work:
Student
- has mostly an active and focused participation in the course work
- is able to take part in the general classroom discussions when needed but might struggle with individual topics
- submits the course assignments on time
- has a solid performance in the course assignments
- meets the attendance requirements

Grade 4 criteria for overall work:
Student
- has an active and focused participation in the course work
- is able to take part in the general classroom discussions when needed
- submits the course assignments on time
- has a great performance in the course assignments
- meets the attendance requirements

Your final grade will depend on your exam results and overall course work. For example, if your final exam grade is somewhere between 3 and 4, your overall work in the course can determine whether your final grade is 3 or 4.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The grade 5 in the final exam:
- 89-100 % success in the final exams

Grade 5 criteria for the overall work:
Student
- has active and focused participation in the course work
- is able to take part in the general classroom discussions when needed
- submits the course assignments on time
- has a great or excellent performance in the course assignments
- meets the attendance requirements

Your final grade will depend on your exam results and overall course work. For example, if your final exam grade is somewhere between 4 and 5, your overall work in the course can determine whether your final grade is 4 or 5.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 20.01.2024

Timing

01.01.2024 - 30.05.2024

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

Entrepreneurship and Team Leadership (Proacademy)

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Maiju Paldán
Person in charge

Maiju Paldán

Groups
  • 23ENTRE

Objectives (course unit)

The course provides the basics of the Finnish language (estimated level A2.1) building up the knowledge and use of Finnish language in simple everyday situations.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• pronounce Finnish quite well
• understand phrases and the highest frequency vocabulary related to areas of most immediate personal relevance (e.g. very basic personal and family information, shopping, local area)
• catch the main point in short, clear, simple messages and announcements
• read very short, simple texts
• find specific, predictable information in simple everyday material such as
advertisements, prospectuses, menus and timetables and understand short simple
personal letters
• participate in a conversation asking and responding to questions about topics studied in
the course
• use their Finnish out of a classroom
• use a series of phrases and sentences to describe in simple terms their family and other
people, living conditions, educational background and their present or most recent job
• write short, simple texts related to everyday topics.

Content (course unit)

• study book Suomen mestari 1, chapters 5 - 7 and 9, moreover free time, health, past
tenses, passive voice

o structural exercises
o pronunciation exercises
o vocabulary exercises
o conversational and drama exercises
o listening comprehension exercises
o reading comprehension exercises
o written exercises.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. They can tell about few of the achieved course contents, but their expression stays limited: both spoken and written language is partly hard to understand. It is difficult for them to take part to a simple discussion. Also their incomplete pronunciation may cause difficulties to understand their speech.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. Students have an active attitude towards studying Finnish language showing that by completing course tasks according to the schedule. They are able to cope in everyday conversations related to topics studied in the course. Students can write short texts about their home, travelling or work. They can pronounce Finnish clearly enough. Students are able to use typical grammatic structures e.g. local cases and past tenses in simple sentences.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. Students have a positive and active attitude towards learning language. They can pronounce Finnish distinctively. They manage quite well in everyday conversations related to topics studied in the course. They can write simple texts quite correctly and recombine words and phrases into new sentences so that used typical grammatic structures are almost correct. They understand the importance of good Finnish language skills to get a job in Finland.

Location and time

See the Finnish info.

Exam schedules

The mid exam: 20.2. at 2-4 PM
The speaking exam: 15.3. at 2-4 PM and 22.3. at 2-4 PM
The final exam: one of the final weeks of April (information will be updated later)

Assessment methods and criteria

The course performance will be evaluated based on the following course work:
- written mid exam (weight 25 %)
- speaking exam (weight 15 %)
- written final exam (weight 60 %)

In the written exam, you will have exercises related to, for example, vocabulary, grammar, and listening comprehension. In the spoken exam, your performance will be evaluated based on the following categories: pronunciation, vocabulary, grammar, fluency, and speech comprehension.

We will discuss the evaluation criteria and attendance requirements in the beginning of the course.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

During the course, you will have
- course meetings
- homework
- two written exams
- one spoken exam

To pass the course, you need to have active engagement both in the classes and the home work. The classes will support your learning but to avoid the risk of failing, you should use the language outside the classes as well.

Learning materials

See the Finnish info.

Student workload

- 2 x 1,5 h of classroom work in a week
- 1,5-3 h of independent work in a week

Completion alternatives

Not available.

Further information

If you are not certain if this is the right course for you, please, contact the Finnish language counsellor Ella Hakala (ella.hakala@tuni.fi).

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 09.01.2024

Timing

01.01.2024 - 31.07.2024

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Marita Mäki
Person in charge

Marita Mäki

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 22IB
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

The course provides the basics of the Finnish language (estimated level A2.1) building up the knowledge and use of Finnish language in simple everyday situations.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• pronounce Finnish quite well
• understand phrases and the highest frequency vocabulary related to areas of most immediate personal relevance (e.g. very basic personal and family information, shopping, local area)
• catch the main point in short, clear, simple messages and announcements
• read very short, simple texts
• find specific, predictable information in simple everyday material such as
advertisements, prospectuses, menus and timetables and understand short simple
personal letters
• participate in a conversation asking and responding to questions about topics studied in
the course
• use their Finnish out of a classroom
• use a series of phrases and sentences to describe in simple terms their family and other
people, living conditions, educational background and their present or most recent job
• write short, simple texts related to everyday topics.

Content (course unit)

• study book Suomen mestari 1, chapters 5 - 7 and 9, moreover free time, health, past
tenses, passive voice

o structural exercises
o pronunciation exercises
o vocabulary exercises
o conversational and drama exercises
o listening comprehension exercises
o reading comprehension exercises
o written exercises.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. They can tell about few of the achieved course contents, but their expression stays limited: both spoken and written language is partly hard to understand. It is difficult for them to take part to a simple discussion. Also their incomplete pronunciation may cause difficulties to understand their speech.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. Students have an active attitude towards studying Finnish language showing that by completing course tasks according to the schedule. They are able to cope in everyday conversations related to topics studied in the course. Students can write short texts about their home, travelling or work. They can pronounce Finnish clearly enough. Students are able to use typical grammatic structures e.g. local cases and past tenses in simple sentences.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. Students have a positive and active attitude towards learning language. They can pronounce Finnish distinctively. They manage quite well in everyday conversations related to topics studied in the course. They can write simple texts quite correctly and recombine words and phrases into new sentences so that used typical grammatic structures are almost correct. They understand the importance of good Finnish language skills to get a job in Finland.

Location and time

The whole spring term on Tuesdays 9.30 - 11.00 (C4-05a) and on Thursdays 9.30 - 11.00 (C4-05b).

Exam schedules

We talk about the dates of the exams in the beginning of the course and mark them on our Moodle.
(A2.1 tests will take place in the week 17 for them who need them to show skills for relief from an annual tuition fee.)

Assessment methods and criteria

To pass the course a minimum attendance 80 % is required as well as completed compulsory assignments. Course grade consists of three parts:

Middle term written test in the week 8
Collaborative video in March
Final written test in the week 16

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

study conversation, collaborative learning, discussion exercises, activating written tasks, learning simulation and games, process writing, short videos made by students

Learning materials

Study book Suomen mestari 1 uudistettu, chapters 5 - 9 + Moodle material created and linked by the teacher.

Student workload

Two double lessons per week plus quite much independent work at home in 14 weeks: 5 ects = work of 135 hours. There is much to study and train well - own time for learning is really needed! All Finnish language activities outside of the classroom are very welcome!

Content scheduling

According to the study material Suomen mestari 1 uudistettu.

Completion alternatives

In case you have completed a similar course in another university, please fill in the application form in Pakki and add the necessary documents (transcript of records).

If you have informally accomplished the goals and want to discuss how to show your skill please contact the teacher via email and explain why you think you should be exempted from the course and how you would you like to develop your Finnish skills.

Practical training and working life cooperation

No.

International connections

The whole group is international! :o)

Further information

-

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students have attended contact lessons less than 80 % . They have not completed course assignments because of lack of activity or gained skills. Their ability to communicate in Finnish at the level A2.1 is insignificant and limited to make understanding possible.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably. They can tell about few of the achieved course contents, but their expression stays limited: both spoken and written language is partly hard to understand. It is difficult for them to take part to a discussion. Also their incomplete pronunciation may cause difficulties to understand their speech.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students have an active attitude towards studying Finnish language showing that by completing course tasks according to the schedule. They are able to cope in most achieved oral course exercises. Students are able to write short texts about travelling, everyday life, working and are able to pronounce Finnish clearly enough. Students’ mother tongue may have an effect in pronunciation and/or sentence structure, but it doesn’t cause problems to understand the meaning of messages.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students have a positive and active attitude towards learning language. They can pronounce Finnish distinctively and are able to use suitable and varied expressions in achieved course exercises using grammar mostly correct way. Students can participate in a conversation asking and responding to questions about topics studied in the course. They can write simple descriptions or stories and recombine words and phrases into new sentences. They understand the importance of good Finnish language skills to get a job in Finland.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 09.01.2024

Timing

01.01.2024 - 31.07.2024

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Maiju Paldán
Person in charge

Kirsi Saarinen

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 22IB
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

The course provides the basics of the Finnish language (estimated level A2.1) building up the knowledge and use of Finnish language in simple everyday situations.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• pronounce Finnish quite well
• understand phrases and the highest frequency vocabulary related to areas of most immediate personal relevance (e.g. very basic personal and family information, shopping, local area)
• catch the main point in short, clear, simple messages and announcements
• read very short, simple texts
• find specific, predictable information in simple everyday material such as
advertisements, prospectuses, menus and timetables and understand short simple
personal letters
• participate in a conversation asking and responding to questions about topics studied in
the course
• use their Finnish out of a classroom
• use a series of phrases and sentences to describe in simple terms their family and other
people, living conditions, educational background and their present or most recent job
• write short, simple texts related to everyday topics.

Content (course unit)

• study book Suomen mestari 1, chapters 5 - 7 and 9, moreover free time, health, past
tenses, passive voice

o structural exercises
o pronunciation exercises
o vocabulary exercises
o conversational and drama exercises
o listening comprehension exercises
o reading comprehension exercises
o written exercises.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. They can tell about few of the achieved course contents, but their expression stays limited: both spoken and written language is partly hard to understand. It is difficult for them to take part to a simple discussion. Also their incomplete pronunciation may cause difficulties to understand their speech.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. Students have an active attitude towards studying Finnish language showing that by completing course tasks according to the schedule. They are able to cope in everyday conversations related to topics studied in the course. Students can write short texts about their home, travelling or work. They can pronounce Finnish clearly enough. Students are able to use typical grammatic structures e.g. local cases and past tenses in simple sentences.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. Students have a positive and active attitude towards learning language. They can pronounce Finnish distinctively. They manage quite well in everyday conversations related to topics studied in the course. They can write simple texts quite correctly and recombine words and phrases into new sentences so that used typical grammatic structures are almost correct. They understand the importance of good Finnish language skills to get a job in Finland.

Location and time

See the Finnish info.

Exam schedules

The mid exam: 20.2. at 11-1 PM
The speaking exam: 14.3. at 11-1 PM and 21.3. at 11-1 PM
The final exam: one of the final weeks of April (information will be updated later)

Assessment methods and criteria

The course performance is evaluated based on the following course work:
- written mid exam (weight 25 %)
- speaking exam (weight 15 %)
- written final exam (weight 60 %)

In the written exam, you will have exercises related to, for example, vocabulary, grammar, and listening comprehension. In the spoken exam, your performance will be evaluated based on the following categories: pronunciation, vocabulary, grammar, fluency, and speech comprehension.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

During the course, you will have
- course meetings
- homework
- two written exams
- one spoken exam

To pass the course, you need to have active engagement both in the classes and the home work. The classes will support your learning but to avoid the risk of failing, you should use the language outside the classes as well.

Learning materials

See the Finnish info.

Student workload

- 2 x 1,5 h of classroom work in a week
- 1,5-3 h of independent work in a week

Further information

If you are not certain if this is the right course for you, please, contact the Finnish language counsellor Ella Hakala (ella.hakala@tuni.fi).

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 16.01.2024

Timing

23.01.2024 - 25.04.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • Finnish
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Terhi Tapaninen
Person in charge

Terhi Tapaninen

Groups
  • 22IB
  • 21IB
  • VAPAA

Location and time

On the course we have meetings two times a week. First meeting online (1 h) and second meeting in classroom (2 h).
Lessons start on week 4, on Tuesday 22nd at 13.00.

Exam schedules

Test dates will be agreed on the course.

Assessment methods and criteria

Participation in the course meetings.
Review of the course assignments.
Review of the exams.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Classroom and online meetings
Course assignments.
Exams (a midterm exam and a final exam).

We practise speaking, listening comprehension, writing, and reading. We will focus on active language use and comprehension.

Learning materials

Teacher´s materials, course book Suomen mestari 2, chapters 5-8.

Student workload

You should prepare for the following schedule:
- Course meetings two times / week.
- 3-6 hours of independent work (homework, course assignments, reviews) in each course week.
- The amount of independent work varies each week.

International connections

The course is aimed for international students.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student has completed all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. The student can tell some things about oneself in Finnish comprehensively. The student is able to tell few things about their background in past tense.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. The student has an active attitude towards studying Finnish language and culture. They are showing that by completing written tasks according to the schedule. The student is able to use structures like past tenses and plural forms in simple sentences. They can tell about small incidents, customs, celebrations, their educational and working background etc. The student is able to write short descriptions and texts like emails and applications in Finnish and is able to pronounce Finnish clearly enough.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students have been able to complete all the assignments acceptably and attended contact lessons at least 80 %. The student has a positive and active attitude towards learning Finnish and is genuinely interested in Finnish culture and brings it up by comparing Finnish culture to his/her own. He/she can pronounce Finnish intelligibly when communicating in simple everyday situations. Expressions used in spoken and written communication are suitable and varied and grammar almost correct.

Enrolment period

02.01.2024 - 01.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 03.05.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Mark Curcher
Person in charge

Mark Curcher

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

National economies are an integral part of the global economy. Issues and events in global economy have strong influence upon the function of national economy.
The course aims at familiarizing the students with global institutions, agreements, events, trends and their relationship to the national economy.

After completing the course, students will be able to:
• Understand the benefits of specialization and the impact on trade and investment
• Know trade barriers and their background factors
• Understand exchange and interest rate mechanisms
• Conceptualize the role of global organizations
• Understand trade liberalization and regional economic integration
• Relationships among national economy, national debt and the international rating agencies

Content (course unit)

• What are the benefits of global trade?
• What are the main international trade theories?
• What are the effects of trade barriers on national economies?
• What are the reasons behind exchange and interest rate volatility?
• What is the role of economic integration in world trade?
• How the rating agencies influence national borrowing rate?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can give the fundamentals for the question: What is global economics about? He/she recognises the difference between micro and macro economy and is able to name essential factors in the field of macro economy. He/she manages to identify the factors that affect an economy. The student can give and receive feedback.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student applies the connections between global economic factors like GDP, GNP, inflation, interest rates and other relevant macro-economic factors. He/she knows the relevant terms and connections and can explain basic cause-effect relationships. He/she sees the importance of global trade and adopts various macro theories. The student gives and receives constructive feedback and develops his/her skills for co-operation.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student analyses and translates the connections within global economy factors. He/she can generalise complicated theories by seeing the relevancy behind the economic signals. He/she can explain economic fluctuations and reasons behind them. He/she justifies outcome for various global assumptions, formulating the impacts of GDP, inflation, employment and other factors related. He/she finds the links between global economy factors by evaluating the information available. The student uses feedback to grow professionally, he/she develops creative and flexible mindset and works in a responsible manner.

Location and time

Tampere, TAMK Kuntokatu

Exam schedules

The assessment schedule and strategy will be informed during the first class.

Assessment methods and criteria

The course will be assessed with both course work assessments and a final summative assessment at the end of the course.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Students will be working individually, in pairs and in small groups as part of a collaborative learning community.
Face to face classes with additional online activities as required.
Teaching strategies will include readings, discussion, facilitation, group and individual work, synchronous and asynchronous activities. Active participation and collaboration will be essential. Students will be expected to demonstrate their learning by presenting work in writing, visually, orally and in presentations.

Learning materials

Materials and resources provided by the lecturer in the Moodle implementation.

Student workload

The course is 3cr (27h each, total 81 hours of student work) which is based on lectures, team working and individual studying.

Content scheduling

As scheduled in Peppi/Pakki and informed in the first class.

Completion alternatives

Not available, the course is based on contact teaching

Practical training and working life cooperation

N/A

International connections

An international implementation.

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student does not meet the evaluation criteria for 1.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students demonstrate a basic understanding of the key concepts of global economics and can describe ideas in simple terms.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students demonstrate a good understanding of the key concepts of global economics and are able to describe, explain and give practical examples of the concepts introduced during the course. This includes understanding the inter-relational aspects of economics and the limitations of the discipline.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students demonstrate a thorough understanding of all the key concepts of global economics and are able to describe, explain and give practical examples of the concepts introduced during the course. This includes understanding the inter-relational aspects of economics and the limitations of the discipline. In addition this exception student will be able to synthesize and analyze contemporary events and apply what they have learned to current affairs and see the relations between economics and social, cultural, historic and political contexts.

Enrolment period

02.01.2024 - 01.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 03.05.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Mark Curcher
Person in charge

Mark Curcher

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

National economies are an integral part of the global economy. Issues and events in global economy have strong influence upon the function of national economy.
The course aims at familiarizing the students with global institutions, agreements, events, trends and their relationship to the national economy.

After completing the course, students will be able to:
• Understand the benefits of specialization and the impact on trade and investment
• Know trade barriers and their background factors
• Understand exchange and interest rate mechanisms
• Conceptualize the role of global organizations
• Understand trade liberalization and regional economic integration
• Relationships among national economy, national debt and the international rating agencies

Content (course unit)

• What are the benefits of global trade?
• What are the main international trade theories?
• What are the effects of trade barriers on national economies?
• What are the reasons behind exchange and interest rate volatility?
• What is the role of economic integration in world trade?
• How the rating agencies influence national borrowing rate?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can give the fundamentals for the question: What is global economics about? He/she recognises the difference between micro and macro economy and is able to name essential factors in the field of macro economy. He/she manages to identify the factors that affect an economy. The student can give and receive feedback.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student applies the connections between global economic factors like GDP, GNP, inflation, interest rates and other relevant macro-economic factors. He/she knows the relevant terms and connections and can explain basic cause-effect relationships. He/she sees the importance of global trade and adopts various macro theories. The student gives and receives constructive feedback and develops his/her skills for co-operation.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student analyses and translates the connections within global economy factors. He/she can generalise complicated theories by seeing the relevancy behind the economic signals. He/she can explain economic fluctuations and reasons behind them. He/she justifies outcome for various global assumptions, formulating the impacts of GDP, inflation, employment and other factors related. He/she finds the links between global economy factors by evaluating the information available. The student uses feedback to grow professionally, he/she develops creative and flexible mindset and works in a responsible manner.

Location and time

Tampere, TAMK Kuntokatu

Exam schedules

The assessment schedule and strategy will be informed during the first class.

Assessment methods and criteria

The course will be assessed with both course work assessments and a final summative assessment at the end of the course.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Students will be working individually, in pairs and in small groups as part of a collaborative learning community.
Face to face classes with additional online activities as required.
Teaching strategies will include readings, discussion, facilitation, group and individual work, synchronous and asynchronous activities. Active participation and collaboration will be essential. Students will be expected to demonstrate their learning by presenting work in writing, visually, orally and in presentations.

Learning materials

Materials and resources provided by the lecturer in the Moodle implementation.

Student workload

The course is 3cr (27h each, total 81 hours of student work) which is based on lectures, team working and individual studying.

Content scheduling

As scheduled in Peppi/Pakki and informed in the first class.

Completion alternatives

Not available, the course is based on contact teaching

Practical training and working life cooperation

N/A

International connections

An international implementation.

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student does not meet the evaluation criteria for 1.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students demonstrate a basic understanding of the key concepts of global economics and can describe ideas in simple terms.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students demonstrate a good understanding of the key concepts of global economics and are able to describe, explain and give practical examples of the concepts introduced during the course. This includes understanding the inter-relational aspects of economics and the limitations of the discipline.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Students demonstrate a thorough understanding of all the key concepts of global economics and are able to describe, explain and give practical examples of the concepts introduced during the course. This includes understanding the inter-relational aspects of economics and the limitations of the discipline. In addition this exception student will be able to synthesize and analyze contemporary events and apply what they have learned to current affairs and see the relations between economics and social, cultural, historic and political contexts.

Enrolment period

06.02.2024 - 06.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 30.04.2024

Credits

5 op

Virtual portion

1 op

Mode of delivery

80 % Contact teaching, 20 % Distance learning

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

15 - 40

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Shaidul Kazi
Person in charge

Shaidul Kazi

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The course aims to provide knowledge and deals with theories, models and techniques for recruitment, management, maintenance and development of competence based human resources for contemporary multi-skilled- virtual-, and network-based organizations.

After completing the course, the student will be able to:
• perform basic functions of HRM (staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance).
• define long term HR needs for a company.
• develop company-wide HR policy.
• maintain contact with labor union concerning different company issues.
• deal with multi-skilled workforce.
• integrate effectively ICT to HRM.

Content (course unit)

The contents include the followings:
• How the contemporary workplace is changing and how the change process is affecting the HRM?
• Why strategic HR planning is necessary for an organization?
• What are the different steps in strategic HR planning?
• How to effectively perform basic functions of HRM?
• How the digitalization process is affecting HR performance?
• What are the basic issues to remember in international HRM?

Prerequisites (course unit)

First year BBA studies or equivalent studies for the exchange students.

Further information (course unit)

Implementation plan.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can recognise basic concepts of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she has a basic understanding of the long-term HR needs for a company and can participate in developing a company-wide HR policy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work. The student can give and receive feedback but considers and assesses things from his/her own viewpoints. The student has the skills to be part of the group dealing with the labour union.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student can explain the good practices of employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. He/she can explain diverse alternatives for the various HR activities and in addition, can be part of creating a new HR policy for a firm. He/she can help to select good actions for solving HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills further. The student can help to deal with the labour union.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student understands the good practices of and the relationships between employee staffing, training, development, motivation and maintenance. The student is able to assist in defining the long-term HR needs for a company. He/she can assess diverse alternatives for the various HR activities, can help to create a new HR policy for a firm and solve HR related problems. The student understands future applications of technology to HR management. He/she can cooperate responsibly, constructively and flexibly with a diverse group of colleagues in solving practical problems. In case of need, the student can deal with the labour union.

Exam schedules

There is no exam but project, presentation and individual task.

Assessment methods and criteria

Active participation to the course, individual task, project and presentation

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Contact lesson
Study conversation
Individual task
Group project
Presentation

Learning materials

Human Resource Management (9th edition or the newer publication), Gary Dessler, Prentice Hall

&

Suggested reading materials (given during the implementation)

Student workload

- Total resource hurs= 27x5 = 135
- Contact meeting 7 (7 x 3): 21 hours
- Project: 30 hours
- Individual task: 30 hours
- Reading: 47 hours

Completion alternatives

Contact to the course teacher

Practical training and working life cooperation

Real world company based course project. The course project wil be done in pairs or in small groups and it will be based on an interview with a human resource manager of a company.

International connections

Open

Further information

This is a contact lesson based course

Enrolment period

01.07.2023 - 31.08.2023

Timing

17.08.2023 - 31.12.2023

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Emmanuel Abruquah
Person in charge

Emmanuel Abruquah

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

The course focuses on learning the basic concepts of information communication technology (ICT) and how to use computers in business perspective. The widely known MS-Office package is in use, with practical approach.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Use computer and its operating system.
• Create documents, calculations, presentations and communicate by using MS-Office.
• Further develop their practical ICT skills.

Content (course unit)

• How to make business documents, where to save and how to print?
• How to make business spreadsheet calculations and charts?
• How to make business presentations?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student knows the basic ICT terms, is familiar with the basic MS Office tools (Excel, PowerPoint, and Word), and can use them. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student is able to use a cloud environment for sharing information. The student takes responsibility of his/her own studying but may still need some support or supervision for using the tools and working in a group.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student recognises well the basic ICT terms, is familiar with the basic MS Office tools (Excel, PowerPoint, Word) and can tailor their use based on the outcome required. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student uses cloud environment efficiently for sharing information. The student can do the given tasks independently and is able to support other team members.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can broadly and independently apply the MS Office tools and cloud environment. The student has a basic knowledge of some supporting tools. The student is very self-confident in solving problems in his/her application area, can explain and teach the tools and methods to others and help his/her team mates in their ICT problems.

Exam schedules

There will be no exams. The evaluation will be based on attaining 80% of attendance and completing the assignments and projects. The quality of work is taken into consideration.

Assessment methods and criteria

Continuous assessment and self-evaluation will be used. Peer evaluation will encourage students to improve their understanding.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

In-class demonstration, class exercises, assignments etc. Attendance is compulsory. At least, 80% of participation in the lessons is a prerequisite to pass the course.
The student submits a self-evaluation and reflective essay, well-formatted at the end of the course.

Learning materials

Materials will be provided on TUNI Moodle.

Student workload

Students should spend time practising with the materials and exercises on TUNI Moodle.
Practising and doing the course assignments.
Students design templates for Office Word, Excel and PowerPoint.

Content scheduling

Editing TAMK's report template
- Saving and filing digital documents
- Ms Word basics and advance
- Ms Excel basics, calculations and functions
- PowerPoint presentation design

Completion alternatives

Prior completion of a similar course, certificate of completion etc Higher Education certificate.

Further information

Students should be able to edit TAMK's report template by the end of the course.

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

- the student has not attended 80% of the classes.
- the student has not provided any medical report to justify his/her absences.
- student has not completed and submitted at least, half of the assignments and projects.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

- the student has attended 80% of the classes.
- the student has completed and submitted at least, more than half of the assignments and projects on the course, with some recognisable errors.
- the student has written and submitted a reflective essay- self-evaluation.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

-the student has submitted the required assignments on time and has demonstrated his ICT skills on all the documents submitted.
- the student has attended 80% of the classes.
- the student has completed and submitted all the required assignments and projects on time, with minor errors
- the student has written and submitted a reflective essay- self-evaluation.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

-the student has submitted the required assignments on time and has demonstrated his ICT skills on all the documents submitted.
- the student has attended 80% of the classes.
- the student has completed and submitted all the required assignments and projects on time, with no errors
- the student has written and submitted a reflective essay- self-evaluation.

Enrolment period

02.06.2023 - 07.09.2023

Timing

30.08.2023 - 06.10.2023

Credits

5 op

Virtual portion

1 op

Mode of delivery

80 % Contact teaching, 20 % Distance learning

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

15 - 80

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sini Jokiniemi
  • Jarmo Tuominiemi
Person in charge

Sini Jokiniemi

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

Learning outcomes of the course:
The course provides a theoretical overview and the tools for creating innovations for profitable business. Using service creation as a tool, it provides insights of product and services development process and the positioning of innovation into right marketplace. Also, creating a reasonable business model and basics of ensuring the intellectual property rights (IPR’s) are discussed.

After completing the course, students will be able to:
• Understand the different aspects of innovation, and its role in developing a business
• Recognize, assess and suggests solutions for supporting organizations innovation performance
• Apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings
• Evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services
• Understand the product and service design process phases
• Identify the critical phases of product and service design projects

Content (course unit)

How to foster innovations?
How to develop products and services from innovations?
What are intellectual property rights and how to ensure them?
How to evaluate project business feasibility?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can name different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing a business. He/she can recognise solutions for supporting an organisation’s innovation performance. The student is able to apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings. He/she can evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student recognises the different phases in the product and service design process.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is familiar with the different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing and growing a business. He/she can recognise and assess solutions for supporting an organisation’s innovation performance. The student understands the strategies most effective for exploiting innovations. The student is able to apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings. He/she can evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student can plan, implement and assess the different phases of the product and service design process. He/she can identify critical phases of product and service design projects.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has in-depth understanding of the different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing and growing a business. He/she can recognise, assess and advocate the most suitable solutions for improving an organisation's innovation performance. The student can develop and implement the most effective strategies for exploiting innovations. The student is able to implement innovation theories into practice in a variety of business settings. He/she can boost the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student can plan, implement and assess the different phases of the product and service design process. He/she can tackle critical phases of product and service design projects.

Location and time

The course starts August 30th of August at 12:15 in class C4-05a. There are altogether 9 teaching sessions taking place twice a week except for the last week.

Exam schedules

There's no exam. The course evaluation is based on the individual learning diary and team/pair exercises. Active attendance in lectures has a positive impact on grading.

Assessment methods and criteria

Individual learning diary
Team assignments
Active participation in the contact sessions and teamwork.
More detailed assessment criteria will be given in the first contact session.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Lectures, team exercises, learning diary

Learning materials

Selected articles available in Moodle
Lecture slides

Student workload

The course is worth 5 credits, which means a total workload of 135 hours. Contact teaching is appr. 27 hours and the rest is students' independent work.

Content scheduling

The course is part of the Innovation Management and Business Development study module. Towards the end of the course "Consultation Projects: Entrepreneurship focus / Business Development focus " course will start. It is the practical part of the study module where the learnings of this course will be implemented.

Completion alternatives

None

Further information

Teachers:
Sini Jokiniemi and Jarmo Tuominiemi

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 31.08.2023

Timing

01.08.2023 - 23.10.2023

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

Business and Media

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sini Jokiniemi
  • Jarmo Tuominiemi
Person in charge

Jarmo Tuominiemi

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

Learning outcomes of the course:
The course provides a theoretical overview and the tools for creating innovations for profitable business. Using service creation as a tool, it provides insights of product and services development process and the positioning of innovation into right marketplace. Also, creating a reasonable business model and basics of ensuring the intellectual property rights (IPR’s) are discussed.

After completing the course, students will be able to:
• Understand the different aspects of innovation, and its role in developing a business
• Recognize, assess and suggests solutions for supporting organizations innovation performance
• Apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings
• Evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services
• Understand the product and service design process phases
• Identify the critical phases of product and service design projects

Content (course unit)

How to foster innovations?
How to develop products and services from innovations?
What are intellectual property rights and how to ensure them?
How to evaluate project business feasibility?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can name different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing a business. He/she can recognise solutions for supporting an organisation’s innovation performance. The student is able to apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings. He/she can evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student recognises the different phases in the product and service design process.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is familiar with the different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing and growing a business. He/she can recognise and assess solutions for supporting an organisation’s innovation performance. The student understands the strategies most effective for exploiting innovations. The student is able to apply innovation theories and practices in a variety of business settings. He/she can evaluate the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student can plan, implement and assess the different phases of the product and service design process. He/she can identify critical phases of product and service design projects.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has in-depth understanding of the different aspects of innovation, and their role in developing and growing a business. He/she can recognise, assess and advocate the most suitable solutions for improving an organisation's innovation performance. The student can develop and implement the most effective strategies for exploiting innovations. The student is able to implement innovation theories into practice in a variety of business settings. He/she can boost the business feasibility of innovations, products and services. The student can plan, implement and assess the different phases of the product and service design process. He/she can tackle critical phases of product and service design projects.

Location and time

The course starts August 30th of August at 14:15 in class C4-05a. There are altogether 9 teaching sessions taking place twice a week except for the last week.

Exam schedules

There's no exam. The course evaluation is based on the individual learning diary and team/pair exercises. Active attendance in lectures has a positive impact on grading.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Lectures, team exercises, learning diary

Learning materials

Selected articles available in Moodle
Lecture slides

Student workload

The course is worth 5 credits, which means a total workload of 135 hours. Contact teaching is appr. 27 hours and the rest is students' independent work.

Content scheduling

The course is part of the Innovation Management and Business Development study module. Towards the end of the course "Consultation Projects: Entrepreneurship focus / Business Development focus " course will start. It is the practical part of the study module where the learnings of this course will be implemented.

Further information

Teachers:
Sini Jokiniemi and Jarmo Tuominiemi

Enrolment period

04.12.2023 - 15.01.2024

Timing

01.01.2024 - 15.04.2024

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Salman Saleem
  • Annikka Lepola
Person in charge

Salman Saleem

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The course aims to provide students with necessary knowledge related to an international project. This course is executed in co-operation with TAMK international partner universities. The students work with a branding project in teams consisting of members from several universities, using virtual communication tools: social media, video meetings and cloud services. In the project the students will learn how to analyze and develop a brand in an international context but quite as importantly how to deal with cultural differences in an international project.

After completing the course, the student will be able to:
• describe and apply a theoretical framework for developing a brand.
• analyze and evaluate strengths and development areas of a brand.
• create or develop a brand strategy for a product, service or a company.
• work in an international project using virtual communication tools.

Content (course unit)

After completing the course, the student will be able to:
• describe and apply a theoretical framework for developing a brand.
• analyze and evaluate strengths and development areas of a brand.
• create or develop a brand strategy for a product, service or a company.
• work in an international project using virtual communication tools.

Prerequisites (course unit)

Basic knowledge of Marketing.

Further information (course unit)

Implementation Plan.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to recognise the basic concepts of branding. He/she is able to conduct his/her part and participate in the brand strategy development assignment, with assistance, following instructions. The student participates in the international teamwork and is able to recognise his/her contribution to the task.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to explain the structure of brand strategy and brand identity as tools of brand management. He/she is able to research the business environment of a brand for developing a brand strategy. The student is able to develop a brand strategy plan. The student acts as an active member of an international project team, takes responsibility of his/her own work and is able to co-operate in a multinational team also by using virtual communication tools.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to analyse the theoretical concepts of branding and apply them in the branding assignment in an excellent manner. He/she is able to develop different solutions for the brand challenge based on the research and assess different alternatives. The student is able to creatively apply the theoretical tools to develop a well reasoned brand strategy. The student takes a leading role in the international teamwork or part of it, can co-operate flexibly and constructively taking into account the cultural differences of the participants and thereby develop the group’s interaction.

Location and time

A compulsory information session for all course participants will be held on Thursday 25th Jan 2024 starting at 15 o'clock on site on campus. The vital arrangements for the course, and in particular for the international intensive week (travel bookings, travel allowances etc.) will be discussed that time.

The virtual kick-off events for the project course will be held on Tuesday 6th February 2023 and Thursday 8th February 2024. The virtual online sessions and classes on site on campus are always on Thursdays afternoons. Participation in these is compulsory for all course participants. In addition to these meetings, the course includes independent team and individual work. Some meetings will be held on site on campus with the national teams. Later in the course, the international teams will work online.

The course includes an international intensive CoBra (Co-Branding) week in Brno, Czech Republic during week 12 (18.3.-22.3.2024), which participants are expected to attend also outside regular class hours. Sunday 17th March is the travel day for the intensive week. Participation in the intensive week is a compulsory part of the course. The project course ends with the intensive week. A more detailed timetable will be given in the beginning of the course.

Exam schedules

The course does not include an exam. This is a project course and the assessment is based on the final outputs of the project team and teamwork performance.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Studying is mainly based on students’ team work around a business branding case, coached by the lecturers from TAMK and the international partner universities. The students work first in national teams and later on in international teams with members from the partner universities. Regular virtual online sessions are an essential part of the course. The national team sessions are held on site on campus.

Content scheduling

A more detailed course timetable and structure will be given in the beginning of the project course.

Practical training and working life cooperation

The course includes a real international business branding case.

International connections

This course is executed in co-operation with TAMK International Business in Finland, Brno University of Technology in Czech Republic, Windesheim University of Applied Sciences in the Netherlands, and Karel de Grote University of Applied Sciences and Arts in Antwerp, Belgium.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to recognise the basic concepts of branding. He/she is able to conduct his/her part and participate in the brand strategy development assignment, with assistance, following instructions. The student participates in the international teamwork and is able to recognise his/her contribution to the task.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to explain the structure of brand strategy and brand identity as tools of brand management. He/she is able to research the business environment of a brand for developing a brand strategy. The student is able to develop a brand strategy plan. The student acts as an active member of an international project team, takes responsibility of his/her own work and is able to co-operate in a multinational team also by using virtual communication tools.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to analyse the theoretical concepts of branding and apply them in the branding assignment in an excellent manner. He/she is able to develop different solutions for the brand challenge based on the research and assess different alternatives. The student is able to creatively apply the theoretical tools to develop a well reasoned brand strategy. The student takes a leading role in the international teamwork or part of it, can co-operate flexibly and constructively taking into account the cultural differences of the participants and thereby develop the group’s interaction.

Enrolment period

23.07.2023 - 21.08.2023

Timing

22.08.2023 - 31.07.2024

Credits

60 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 2

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Groups
  • AVOINAMK

Content (course unit)

Studies consist of first year studies of the degree programme.

You will study full time in the degree programme´s student group. Open UAS students are reserved two (2) study places in the group.

The enrollment will start on 2 August at 9 am and end on 3 August at 11.59 pm. If there are still study places left after the enrollment period ends, the period may be continued. Places are filled on a first-come-first-serve basis and registration is done in our online store.

The fee for the open path studies is 300 euros. You pay 150 € when enrolling and 150 € will be invoiced in September.

Path studies in English require good oral and written English language skills.


The fee for the first year is the same for all students. If you apply to become a degree student and are not an EU/EEA student, you will have a tuition fee like all the other non-EU/EEA –students.

Degree application and student selection
You can apply for admission to the degree programme based on your Open UAS studies. If you start path studies in the autumn 2023, you will be able to apply to become a degree student in the application on the basis of Open UAS studies in studyinfo.fi in May 2024.
Student selection is made considering your completed amount of credit points and study success. Study success means the GPA of the studies completed during your Open UAS Path Studies. If necessary, students are placed in order by their GPA (highest to lowest).
Required amount of credit points (Bachelor in International Business 50 cr) has to be completed by 31 July 2024.
Student Benefits
Open UAS students do not receive Kela’s financial aid for students or any other student benefits. If you are a customer of TE Services, you should check your study right with them before signing up for Open UAS studies.

Assessment scale

0-5

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 31.12.2023

Timing

01.01.2024 - 31.12.2024

Credits

30 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Marita Tuomala
  • Janne Hopeela
Person in charge

Marita Tuomala

Groups
  • 22IB
  • 21IB

Objectives (course unit)

Practical training will familiarize the students in a supervised manner with the practical work assignments of the field studied as well as application of knowledge and skills in working life. In the International Business programme, the Finnish students look for a practical training place abroad, while the foreign students seek for a job in Finland.

The International Practical Training (5 months = 30 credits) must be a full-time position. The training can be done in no more than two parts. The shortest accepted full-time position can be of one month in length. Before starting the international practical training, the students will need to participate in a practical training orientation program, which will be arranged during the late autumn term of the second year. The student must contact the Practical Training Supervisor well in advance before the work placement and a written agreement on the practical training is required.

After and during the practical training, the students will be able to:
• learn the organizational culture of the employer and rules of the working life.
• apply learned theory and skills with practice.
• learn practicalities of the field studied.
• plan their career based on their practical training experience.
• create networks with the employer and the working life.
• collect ideas for the final thesis.

Content (course unit)

The contents include the followings:
• What does supervised practical training mean?
• What are the tasks of a BBA?
• How to act as a member of a work community?
• What are my strengths and ‘development areas’ in the working life?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, pass/fail (course unit)

Pass:

The student completes practical training for the required length in practical assignments in their field of study. He/she is able to apply the rules, knowledge and skills to their practical training. All the required documentation is submitted to the practical training supervisor and the feedback discussion takes place. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility of his/her own work.

Fail:
The student has does not complete the required length of practical training in their field of study. The required documents are not submitted to the supervisor, and no feedback discussion takes place with the practical training supervisor.

Location and time

During the 2nd or 3rd study year either in Finland or abroad

Exam schedules

No exam. Students are writing reports and weekly diaries during the practical training period.

Assessment methods and criteria

During the practical training TAMK BBA students are building their knowledge and practical skills in the field of their chosen mandatory module of the TAMK BBA programme. Evaluation is based on practical training reports and final discussion after the practical training period -> pass.

Assessment scale

Pass/Fail

Teaching methods

Before starting the practical training the students will need to participate in a Practical Training Orientation which will be arranged during the autumn term of the second study year. The student must contact the Practical Training Supervisor at TAMK well in advance before signing the practical training agreement. A written agreement is always required. Students will have a supervisor both in the company and at TAMK during their practical training. Students are writing reports and weekly diaries during the practical training period.

Learning materials

Guidelines for Practical Training are discussed during the Practical Training Orientation. Description of Practical Training can be found in IB Curriculum and more detailed guidelines in TAMK Intra, student's handbook.

Student workload

The practical training is 30 ECTS which equals 5 months of full-time work (20 working weeks). The practical training can be done in no more than two parts.

Completion alternatives

In case of accreditation of your previous work experience please contact either Ms. Tuomala or Mr. Hopeela

Practical training and working life cooperation

During the practical training period the students will learn the organizational culture of the employer and rules of the working life. Students will find the work placement themselves. Students are able to use TAMK's JobTeaser portal to find internships.

International connections

Finnish degree students are recommended to look for practical training positions abroad and foreign degree students either in Finland or abroad. We have some international connections; please contact your practical training supervisors.

Further information

For more information please contact either:
Marita Tuomala; marita.tuomala@tuni.fi or
Janne Hopeela; janne.hopeela@tuni.fi

Assessment criteria - pass/fail (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Pass - when all the required reports and a copy of the employment / internship certificate have been submitted to the practical training supervisor in Moodle and the feedback discussion has taken place between the student and the practical training supervisor at TAMK.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 09.01.2024

Timing

10.01.2024 - 22.02.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Tomi Leino
  • Juha Tuominen
Person in charge

Juha Tuominen

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course is an introduction to practices of international trade and to legal framework in international trade transactions. This course consists of two parts A. Practices of International Trade and B. Introduction to International Law and Contracts.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Describe the contents and requirements of international offers and invoices.
• Define the terms of delivery (Incoterms) and know how to use them.
• Explain and describe the main international payment methods and key documents in export process.
• Explain how to use INTRASTAT-statistics and customs clearance in foreign trade.
• Know the basic concepts of contract law and contract terms commonly used in international agreements.
• Identify situations where CISG applies and what the basic obligations of a seller and a buyer are under CISG.
• Know what a breach of contract means and the possible remedies for a breach of contract.
• Know the differences between common dispute resolution mechanisms.

Content (course unit)

• What are the contents and requirements of international offers and invoices?
• How does one use international delivery terms - Incoterms in offers and contracts?
• What are the main international payment methods and key documents in foreign trade?
• What are INTRASTAT-statistics and customs clearance and when are they needed?
• What are the main principles of contract law in international trade?
• What is the scope of application of the CISG and what are the basic obligations of parties?
• How can contractual disputes be resolved and what are the sanctions for breach of contract?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can recognise, name and define basic concepts and terms in international trade and international contract law. The student can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work in individual and team assignments.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to explain, compare and apply the terms and concepts in international trade and international contract law. The student can solve problems in case studies and assignments and justify his/her choice. The student takes responsibility and commits to group activities in addition to his/her own work.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can apply the terms and concepts in international trade and international contract law extensively and is able to analyse and relate them to professional context. The student is able to assess diverse solution alternatives in case studies and assignments. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

Location and time

The course will start week 2.

Exam schedules

PART A: Exam dates will be informed later
PART B. Exam dates will be informed later

Assessment methods and criteria

Grading scale 0 - 5. Total Grade: PART A. 70 % + PART B. 30 %

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

PART A / Tuominen: International Trade; Contact teaching in class, exercises, assignments, exam in Moodle
PART B / Leino: International Contracts - starting week 6; Contact teaching online, materials and assignments in Moodle

Learning materials

ICC Guide to Export / Import - Global Business Standards and Strategies by Guillermo C. Jimenez. ICC Publications 2018. Fifth Edition.

Student workload

3 ECTS = 80 hours student time usage
PART A: 2 ECTS: About 20 hours lectures + 20 hours studying the course literature and materials + 10 hours making the L/C assignment and other assignments
PART B: 1 ECTS: About 30 hours; lectures + assignments

Content scheduling

Part A: Practices of International trade; weeks 2 - 10
Part B: International Law and Contracts; weeks 3 - 5
The detailed course plan will be introduced during the first class.

Completion alternatives

None

Practical training and working life cooperation

None

International connections

None

Further information

Further information:
Juha Tuominen
juha.tuominen@tuni.fi

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student is not able to name or define the basic concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law. The student has failed in exam / exams and / or mandatory assignments.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has limited knowledge of the basic concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in exam grades 1 - 2. The student is able to list, define and explain the basic concepts and terms in mandatory assignments.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has good knowledge of the concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in exam grades 3 - 4. The student is able to use and apply the terms and concepts well in simple tasks and mandatory assignments.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has excellent knowledge of the concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in an exam grade 5. The student masters the terms and concepts of the subject matter in an excellent manner and is able to apply and analyse the terms and concepts extensively in mandatory assignments and challenging case studies.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 09.01.2024

Timing

10.01.2024 - 22.02.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Tomi Leino
  • Juha Tuominen
Person in charge

Juha Tuominen

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course is an introduction to practices of international trade and to legal framework in international trade transactions. This course consists of two parts A. Practices of International Trade and B. Introduction to International Law and Contracts.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Describe the contents and requirements of international offers and invoices.
• Define the terms of delivery (Incoterms) and know how to use them.
• Explain and describe the main international payment methods and key documents in export process.
• Explain how to use INTRASTAT-statistics and customs clearance in foreign trade.
• Know the basic concepts of contract law and contract terms commonly used in international agreements.
• Identify situations where CISG applies and what the basic obligations of a seller and a buyer are under CISG.
• Know what a breach of contract means and the possible remedies for a breach of contract.
• Know the differences between common dispute resolution mechanisms.

Content (course unit)

• What are the contents and requirements of international offers and invoices?
• How does one use international delivery terms - Incoterms in offers and contracts?
• What are the main international payment methods and key documents in foreign trade?
• What are INTRASTAT-statistics and customs clearance and when are they needed?
• What are the main principles of contract law in international trade?
• What is the scope of application of the CISG and what are the basic obligations of parties?
• How can contractual disputes be resolved and what are the sanctions for breach of contract?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can recognise, name and define basic concepts and terms in international trade and international contract law. The student can work in a group and take responsibility for his/her own work in individual and team assignments.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to explain, compare and apply the terms and concepts in international trade and international contract law. The student can solve problems in case studies and assignments and justify his/her choice. The student takes responsibility and commits to group activities in addition to his/her own work.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can apply the terms and concepts in international trade and international contract law extensively and is able to analyse and relate them to professional context. The student is able to assess diverse solution alternatives in case studies and assignments. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

Location and time

The course will start week 2.

Exam schedules

PART A: Exam dates will be informed later
PART B. Exam dates will be informed later

Assessment methods and criteria

Grading scale 0 - 5. Total Grade: PART A. 70 % + PART B. 30 %

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

PART A / Tuominen: International Trade; Contact teaching in class, exercises, assignments, exam in Moodle
PART B / Leino: International Contracts - starting week 6; Contact teaching online, materials and assignments in Moodle

Learning materials

ICC Guide to Export / Import - Global Business Standards and Strategies by Guillermo C. Jimenez. ICC Publications 2018. Fifth Edition.

Student workload

3 ECTS = 80 hours student time usage
PART A: 2 ECTS: About 20 hours lectures + 20 hours studying the course literature and materials + 10 hours making the L/C assignment and other assignments
PART B: 1 ECTS: About 30 hours; lectures + assignments

Content scheduling

Part A: Practices of International trade; weeks 2 - 10
Part B: International Law and Contracts; weeks 3 - 5
The detailed course plan will be introduced during the first class.

Completion alternatives

None

Practical training and working life cooperation

None

International connections

None

Further information

Further information:
Juha Tuominen
juha.tuominen@tuni.fi

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student is not able to name or define the basic concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law. The student has failed in exam / exams and / or mandatory assignments.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has limited knowledge of the basic concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in exam grades 1 - 2. The student is able to list, define and explain the basic concepts and terms in mandatory assignments.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has good knowledge of the concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in exam grades 3 - 4. The student is able to use and apply the terms and concepts well in simple tasks and mandatory assignments.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has excellent knowledge of the concepts and terms in International Trade and International Contract Law, resulting in an exam grade 5. The student masters the terms and concepts of the subject matter in an excellent manner and is able to apply and analyse the terms and concepts extensively in mandatory assignments and challenging case studies.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 10.09.2023

Timing

01.08.2023 - 12.10.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Petteri Vilén
Person in charge

Petteri Vilén

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course, ABC of accounting, introduces the fundamentals of company accounting principles and practices. The perspective is practical, including both financial and management accounting themes.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• understand the role and relevancy of finance function within a company
• understand relevant finance and accounting terminology
• utilize key finance and accounting elements of a company

Content (course unit)

• What are Profit & Loss, Balance sheet and Cash Flow?
• What are financial and management accounting about?
• What is double entry bookkeeping system?
• How to evaluate business financials?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student recognizes the role of accounting in a company and relevant accounting principles and practices. The student can name the most relevant topics in financial accounting and sees the purpose of operating a business. The student identifies the principles of bookkeeping and financial statements and can make basic bookkeeping postings. He/she recognizes the key principles of Finnish business taxation and legal obligations. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility as an individual learner, and act as part of a team.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to structure the connection between profitability, balance sheet and cash flow. The student can apply the principles of double entry postings and name the phases of year end close. The student is able to apply calculations for VAT, payroll and other obligations; he/she can make simple year end closings based on financial accounting process. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback and develop his/her interaction skills, adding value to the team.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student adapts the course themes at advanced level. He/she expands the context with curiosity and analyses the course themes actively. The student finds the path towards academic approach and uses relevant information sources. The student is able to evaluate and assess financial accounting processes and build creative solutions by combining the course themes. The student pays needed attention to detail in cases, looks for alternative perspectives. The student uses feedback to iterate the learning process. The student is able to develop creative and constructive working methods and bring professional commitment throughout the course.

Location and time

TAMK Kuntokatu 3

Exam schedules

The exam date is informed during the course, the exam date is within the course time frame
The retake is to be agreed with the lecturer.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Contact teaching and exercises

Learning materials

- Course slides by the lecturer (.ppt)
- Excel exercises (.xl)
- Course book as supportive material, to be informed during the course

Student workload

2 credits (2*27h), based on course materials and exercises dedicated

Content scheduling

3* times lectures and the exam. The schedule to be informed during the lectures.

Completion alternatives

The basic requirement is the exam, no other alternatives

International connections

An IB course with international students, the course is on english.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 10.09.2023

Timing

01.08.2023 - 12.10.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Petteri Vilén
Person in charge

Petteri Vilén

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course, ABC of accounting, introduces the fundamentals of company accounting principles and practices. The perspective is practical, including both financial and management accounting themes.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• understand the role and relevancy of finance function within a company
• understand relevant finance and accounting terminology
• utilize key finance and accounting elements of a company

Content (course unit)

• What are Profit & Loss, Balance sheet and Cash Flow?
• What are financial and management accounting about?
• What is double entry bookkeeping system?
• How to evaluate business financials?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student recognizes the role of accounting in a company and relevant accounting principles and practices. The student can name the most relevant topics in financial accounting and sees the purpose of operating a business. The student identifies the principles of bookkeeping and financial statements and can make basic bookkeeping postings. He/she recognizes the key principles of Finnish business taxation and legal obligations. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility as an individual learner, and act as part of a team.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to structure the connection between profitability, balance sheet and cash flow. The student can apply the principles of double entry postings and name the phases of year end close. The student is able to apply calculations for VAT, payroll and other obligations; he/she can make simple year end closings based on financial accounting process. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback and develop his/her interaction skills, adding value to the team.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student adapts the course themes at advanced level. He/she expands the context with curiosity and analyses the course themes actively. The student finds the path towards academic approach and uses relevant information sources. The student is able to evaluate and assess financial accounting processes and build creative solutions by combining the course themes. The student pays needed attention to detail in cases, looks for alternative perspectives. The student uses feedback to iterate the learning process. The student is able to develop creative and constructive working methods and bring professional commitment throughout the course.

Location and time

TAMK Kuntokatu 3

Exam schedules

The exam date is informed during the course, the exam date is within the course time frame
The retake is to be agreed with the lecturer.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Contact teaching and exercises

Learning materials

- Course slides by the lecturer (.ppt)
- Excel exercises (.xl)
- Course book as supportive material, to be informed during the course

Student workload

2 credits (2*27h), based on course materials and exercises dedicated

Content scheduling

3* times lectures and the exam. The schedule to be informed during the lectures.

Completion alternatives

The basic requirement is the exam, no other alternatives

International connections

An IB course with international students, the course is on english.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 12.09.2023

Timing

01.08.2023 - 23.10.2023

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Elena Grigorova
  • Tero Poutala
Person in charge

Elena Grigorova

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course is an introduction to company processes and functions in a modern business environment. The aim is to cover the essentials for business operations and introduce the key legal aspects of setting up a business in Finland and choosing a company legal type. The students will learn to search for and apply professionally significant legal information.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• have a good insight into functions of modern business environment.
• adopt the principles of business profitability, liquidity and solvency.
• analyze the interdependence of various business variables.
• indentify and use the key sources of Finnish law
• describe the type of enterprise and their key differences
• understand the procedures required to establish a company
• draw up documents for the formation and registration of a company

Content (course unit)

• What is a company and business operations?
• How to evaluate and measure the success of a business?
• What is organisational structure and its functions?
• What are the key sources of law and how to utilize them?
• Who has the right to trade in Finland
• What legal considerations are relevant to setting up a business?
• What are the key differences between the company legal forms?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student recognises main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with simple isolated examples. Work is poorly structured and there is no relationship to other ideas, concepts or previous knowledge. The student struggles to assess the impact of business activities on the business or society in general. The student recognizes the key sources of law and is able to define company legal forms.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student demonstrates sound understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with multiple relevant examples. He/she can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world and offer reasonable solutions. Work is mostly logical and well-structured, with some inconsistencies or minor errors. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and its immediate surrounding, mostly in the short-term. He/she can apply the key sources of law and is able to explain differences between company legal forms.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student demonstrates deep understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with authentic, connected examples. The student can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world, analyse underlying problems and synthesise solutions out of available alternatives. Work is logical and well-structured, and ideas are clearly expressed. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and the society in general, both in the short- and long-term, and demonstrates commitment to sustainable development. The student is able to apply different sources of law extensively and analyse and assess different company forms in a professional manner.

Location and time

Business Operations:
• According to the timetable; on campus
Legal aspects:
• According to the timetable; on campus

Exam schedules

Business Operations:
Exam dates and arrangements will be discussed in class at the start of the course.

Assessment methods and criteria

Introduction to Business Operations (2 cr):
- Individual exam (70%)
- Participation in classroom discussions and group work (30%)
Legal Aspects (1 cr):
- Active participation and written assignment (100%)

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Lectures, group work, self-study

Learning materials

Business Operations:
• Online resources and materials in Moodle
Legal Aspects (required reading):
• Surakka, Aapo. (2012). Access to Finnish law. Talentum Media. Pages 16–25 and 88–102.
Available in digital form in TAMK-Finna Alma Talent Verkkokirjahylly.
• Items covered in class, and
• Materials in Moodle

Student workload

- Contact lessons 21 hours (7 x 3 h)
- Independent study 60 hours

Completion alternatives

None

Further information

- Mandatory attendance: 80%
- There is no hybrid option (some students on campus, some online).

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student recognises main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with simple isolated examples. Work is poorly structured and there is no relationship to other ideas, concepts or previous knowledge. The student struggles to assess the impact of business activities on the business or society in general. The student recognizes the key sources of law and is able to define company legal forms.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student demonstrates sound understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with multiple relevant examples. He/she can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world and offer reasonable solutions. Work is mostly logical and well-structured, with some inconsistencies or minor errors. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and its immediate surrounding, mostly in the short-term. He/she can apply the key sources of law and is able to explain differences between company legal forms.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student demonstrates deep understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with authentic, connected examples. The student can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world, analyse underlying problems and synthesise solutions out of available alternatives. Work is logical and well-structured, and ideas are clearly expressed. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and the society in general, both in the short- and long-term, and demonstrates commitment to sustainable development. The student is able to apply different sources of law extensively and analyse and assess different company forms in a professional manner.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 30.08.2023

Timing

01.08.2023 - 23.10.2023

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Elena Grigorova
  • Tero Poutala
Person in charge

Elena Grigorova

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course is an introduction to company processes and functions in a modern business environment. The aim is to cover the essentials for business operations and introduce the key legal aspects of setting up a business in Finland and choosing a company legal type. The students will learn to search for and apply professionally significant legal information.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• have a good insight into functions of modern business environment.
• adopt the principles of business profitability, liquidity and solvency.
• analyze the interdependence of various business variables.
• indentify and use the key sources of Finnish law
• describe the type of enterprise and their key differences
• understand the procedures required to establish a company
• draw up documents for the formation and registration of a company

Content (course unit)

• What is a company and business operations?
• How to evaluate and measure the success of a business?
• What is organisational structure and its functions?
• What are the key sources of law and how to utilize them?
• Who has the right to trade in Finland
• What legal considerations are relevant to setting up a business?
• What are the key differences between the company legal forms?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student recognises main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with simple isolated examples. Work is poorly structured and there is no relationship to other ideas, concepts or previous knowledge. The student struggles to assess the impact of business activities on the business or society in general. The student recognizes the key sources of law and is able to define company legal forms.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student demonstrates sound understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with multiple relevant examples. He/she can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world and offer reasonable solutions. Work is mostly logical and well-structured, with some inconsistencies or minor errors. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and its immediate surrounding, mostly in the short-term. He/she can apply the key sources of law and is able to explain differences between company legal forms.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student demonstrates deep understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with authentic, connected examples. The student can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world, analyse underlying problems and synthesise solutions out of available alternatives. Work is logical and well-structured, and ideas are clearly expressed. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and the society in general, both in the short- and long-term, and demonstrates commitment to sustainable development. The student is able to apply different sources of law extensively and analyse and assess different company forms in a professional manner.

Location and time

Business Operations:
• According to the timetable; on campus
Legal aspects:
• According to the timetable; on campus

Exam schedules

Business Operations:
Exam dates and arrangements will be discussed in class at the start of the course.

Assessment methods and criteria

Introduction to Business Operations (2 cr):
- Individual exam (70%)
- Participation in classroom discussions and group work (30%)
Legal Aspects (1 cr):
- Active participation and written assignment (100%)

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Lectures, group work, self-study

Learning materials

Business Operations:
• Online resources and materials in Moodle
Legal Aspects (required reading):
• Surakka, Aapo. (2012). Access to Finnish law. Talentum Media. Pages 16–25 and 88–102.
Available in digital form in TAMK-Finna Alma Talent Verkkokirjahylly.
• Items covered in class, and
• Materials in Moodle

Student workload

- Contact lessons 21 hours (7 x 3 h)
- Independent study 60 hours

Completion alternatives

None

Further information

- Mandatory attendance: 80%
- There is no hybrid option (some students on campus, some online).

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student recognises main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with simple isolated examples. Work is poorly structured and there is no relationship to other ideas, concepts or previous knowledge. The student struggles to assess the impact of business activities on the business or society in general. The student recognizes the key sources of law and is able to define company legal forms.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student demonstrates sound understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with multiple relevant examples. He/she can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world and offer reasonable solutions. Work is mostly logical and well-structured, with some inconsistencies or minor errors. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and its immediate surrounding, mostly in the short-term. He/she can apply the key sources of law and is able to explain differences between company legal forms.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student demonstrates deep understanding of the main ideas and concepts related to business operations and can illustrate them with authentic, connected examples. The student can establish causal and consequential relationships between events in the business world, analyse underlying problems and synthesise solutions out of available alternatives. Work is logical and well-structured, and ideas are clearly expressed. The student can assess the impact of business activities on the business itself and the society in general, both in the short- and long-term, and demonstrates commitment to sustainable development. The student is able to apply different sources of law extensively and analyse and assess different company forms in a professional manner.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 10.09.2023

Timing

28.08.2023 - 22.10.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 40

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sari Matala
Person in charge

Sari Matala

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

Selling goods and services is not enough in modern economy. There is a need to consider the extra value of business supply by designing holistic, multisensory experiences for customers. Tourism is a typical business sector to implement experience economy characteristics and benefit from it.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Understand and identify the nature and the characteristics of experience economy.
• Comprehend the characteristics of tourism business
• Apply theories of experience economy, tourist motivational factors and tourist typology in business planning

Content (course unit)

• What is experience economy about and how can we recognize it in modern world?
• What kind of a phenomenon is tourism and what are the main types of tourism business?
• How to apply the characteristics of tourism phenomenon in business planning?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can recognize and define the basic concepts of the experience economy in the context of tourism. The student is able to discuss and consider some characteristics of the experience economy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility on his/her own work.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to explain, compare and apply the theories of the experience economy and tourism. The student can make plans, solve problems, and choose an appropriate course of action. The student can take responsibility and commit to the group activities in addition to his/her own work.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can generalise and analyse extensive entities and relations between the concepts and theories of the experience economy. The student can search for diverse courses of action and solution alternatives and assess these alternatives. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

Exam schedules

No exam

Assessment methods and criteria

Individual working, team working, discussion. Understanding experience economy, identifying characteristics and nature of it (and tourism business), applying academic material and reflecting it in business planning.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

The course combines face to face and online meetings, reading, discussion and peer-to-peer interaction as well as a team work assignment. The assignment is completed in small groups; the IB student teams are split into two small groups of 3-4 students.

Learning materials

See Moodle (available in Autumn 2023)
for the most relevant material on experience economy. Also additional inspirational material will be given. It is recommended that the student also acquires own suitable material for one's own learning and the task at hand.

Student workload

2 ECTS equals 54 hours of student work. The work load is divided between teacher driven sessions as well as group and individual work. Contact session (3 x 2 h = 6 hours), individual reading tasks and material search (~12 hours) and team work assignment (36 hours).
See detailed schedule in Moodle (available in Autumn 2023)

Content scheduling

See Moodle schedule (available in Autumn 2023)

Completion alternatives

No alternative means of completion.

International connections

International student teams

Further information

Team work otcomes (Analysis paper) will be assessed as a group outcome (group members receiving the same grade). Make sure that your personal output/commitment is proper enough. Group is free to set extra task(s) for those who are not participating group work and also free to inform teacher of possible lower grade suggestion in such a case. Task must be submitted in time! Discuss with teacher beforehand, if extra time is needed.

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

No participation or poor participating in team working (peer evaluation). Task description is not followed. Student is not able to apply the experience economy (and tourism) principles/theories, student is not able to understand and apply material presented.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student is partly following the task description and/or understanding and applying the experience economy (and tourism) principles/theories. Student is able to discuss and consider only few characteristics when conducting the tasks. Material presented for the tasks is only partly applied and understood.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student is following the task description and understands and applies theories of experience economy (and tourism). Student is able to consider and discuss most of the significant characteristics of experience economy (and tourism) and presents examples. Material presented for the tasks is well applied.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student implements thorough understanding of the experience economy (and tourism) concepts and characteristics and is able to apply these fluently in business planning. Discussing and reflecting the ideas and characteristics of experience economy (and tourism) is fluent by various examples and own, new ideas or perspectives. Material presented for the tasks is carefully applied.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 10.09.2023

Timing

28.08.2023 - 22.10.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sari Matala
Person in charge

Sari Matala

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

Selling goods and services is not enough in modern economy. There is a need to consider the extra value of business supply by designing holistic, multisensory experiences for customers. Tourism is a typical business sector to implement experience economy characteristics and benefit from it.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Understand and identify the nature and the characteristics of experience economy.
• Comprehend the characteristics of tourism business
• Apply theories of experience economy, tourist motivational factors and tourist typology in business planning

Content (course unit)

• What is experience economy about and how can we recognize it in modern world?
• What kind of a phenomenon is tourism and what are the main types of tourism business?
• How to apply the characteristics of tourism phenomenon in business planning?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can recognize and define the basic concepts of the experience economy in the context of tourism. The student is able to discuss and consider some characteristics of the experience economy. He/she can work in a group and take responsibility on his/her own work.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to explain, compare and apply the theories of the experience economy and tourism. The student can make plans, solve problems, and choose an appropriate course of action. The student can take responsibility and commit to the group activities in addition to his/her own work.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can generalise and analyse extensive entities and relations between the concepts and theories of the experience economy. The student can search for diverse courses of action and solution alternatives and assess these alternatives. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively and develop his/her own and the group’s interaction.

Exam schedules

No exam

Assessment methods and criteria

Individual working, team working, discussion. Understanding experience economy, identifying characteristics and nature of it (and tourism business), applying academic material and reflecting it in business planning.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

The course combines face to face and online meetings, reading, discussion and peer-to-peer interaction as well as a team work assignment. The assignment is completed in small groups; the IB student teams are split into two small groups of 3-4 students.

Learning materials

See Moodle page (available in Autumn 2023)
https://moodle.tuni.fi/course/view.php?id=38007

for the most relevant material on experience economy. Also additional inspirational material will be given. It is recommended that the student also acquires own suitable material for one's own learning and the task at hand.

Student workload

2 ECTS equals 54 hours of student work. The work load is divided between teacher driven sessions as well as group and individual work. Contact session (3 x 2 h = 6 hours), individual reading tasks and material search (~12 hours) and team work assignment (36 hours).
See detailed schedule in Moodle (available in Autumn 2023)

Content scheduling

See Moodle schedule (available in Autumn 2023)

Completion alternatives

No alternative means of completion.

International connections

International student teams

Further information

Team work otcomes (Analysis paper) will be assessed as a group outcome (group members receiving the same grade). Make sure that your personal output/commitment is proper enough. Group is free to set extra task(s) for those who are not participating group work and also free to inform teacher of possible lower grade suggestion in such a case. Task must be submitted in time! Discuss with teacher beforehand, if extra time is needed.

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

No participation or poor participating in team working (peer evaluation). Task description is not followed. Student is not able to apply the experience economy (and tourism) principles/theories, student is not able to understand and apply material presented.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student is partly following the task description and/or understanding and applying the experience economy (and tourism) principles/theories. Student is able to discuss and consider only few characteristics when conducting the tasks. Material presented for the tasks is only partly applied and understood.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student is following the task description and understands and applies theories of experience economy (and tourism). Student is able to consider and discuss most of the significant characteristics of experience economy (and tourism) and presents examples. Material presented for the tasks is well applied.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student implements thorough understanding of the experience economy (and tourism) concepts and characteristics and is able to apply these fluently in business planning. Discussing and reflecting the ideas and characteristics of experience economy (and tourism) is fluent by various examples and own, new ideas or perspectives. Material presented for the tasks is carefully applied.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 10.09.2023

Timing

01.08.2023 - 23.10.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Salman Saleem
Person in charge

Salman Saleem

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course is an introduction to modern business marketing. It introduces basic marketing concepts, theories and language with a focus of understanding the role and the needs of the customer in consumer business and business-to-business marketing.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Demonstrate knowledge about the significance and role of marketing
in business management.
• Describe the value creation process for customers by understanding
customer needs.
• Demonstrate knowledge of modern marketing mix in theory and
practice.
• Write a marketing plan for their business.

Content (course unit)

• What is marketing and what do marketers do?
• How to create customer value and experience?
• How to analyse marketing environment and collect marketing information?
• What are products, services and brands?
• How to do pricing?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can recognize and name the basic concepts of marketing. He/she can use the basic terms in a correct way and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted, and work in a team and take responsibility of his/her own work.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to make a marketing plan accordingly. The student can select the most appropriate course of action from diverse options and justify his/her choice. The student has participated in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/hers knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student understands extensively the concepts and principles of marketing. The student is able to conduct a fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student combines different solution alternatives creatively or creates new ones. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student cooperates responsibly, flexibly and constructively.

Location and time

Sessions will be held according to the schedule in Pakki.

Exam schedules

The final exam will be given at the last class meeting.

Assessment methods and criteria

According to TAMK evaluation criteria (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research

Learning materials

Required Textbook 
Kotler, P., Armstrong, G., Harris, L. C., & He, H. (2020). Principles of marketing: 8th European edition. 
Additional course material, such as blogs, videos, blogs, and short articles, will be provided in Moodle Workspace.

Student workload

According to the TAMK schedule, ECT credits, and Moodle timing instructions.
Students are expected to:
- Attend lessons
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Details given in the first lesson

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Project work/case studies

International connections

Cases and discussion, global operational business environment, and international collaborative projects

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can recognize and name the basic concepts of marketing. He/she can use the basic terms in a correct way and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted, work in a team and take responsibility for his/her own work.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to make a marketing plan accordingly. The student can select the most appropriate course of action from diverse options and justify his/her choice. The student has participated in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/hers knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student understands extensively the concepts and principles of marketing. The student is able to conduct a fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student combines different solution alternatives creatively or creates new ones. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active. The student cooperates responsibly, flexibly, and constructively.

Enrolment period

24.09.2023 - 23.10.2023

Timing

24.10.2023 - 31.12.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Salman Saleem
Person in charge

Salman Saleem

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course is an introduction to modern business marketing. It introduces basic marketing concepts, theories and language with a focus of understanding the role and the needs of the customer in consumer business and business-to-business marketing.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Demonstrate knowledge about the significance and role of marketing
in business management.
• Describe the value creation process for customers by understanding
customer needs.
• Demonstrate knowledge of modern marketing mix in theory and
practice.
• Write a marketing plan.

Content (course unit)

• What is modern multichannel marketing?
• What are examples of doing advertising, PR; personal selling and sales
promotion?
• How to do direct, online, social media and mobile marketing?
• What is sustainable marketing?
• How to write a marketing plan for a business and create website contents?

Prerequisites (course unit)

Introduction to Marketing 1

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can recognize and define the basics of modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix. He/she can use the basic terms and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted. The student takes responsibility of his/her own work and can work in a group.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student applies modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix in marketing planning accordingly and solves the problems associated with it. The student participates in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the outcome with his/her knowledge. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student understands the concepts and principles of marketing extensively. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. He/she assesses diverse solution alternatives in marketing planning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner.

Location and time

Sessions will be held according to the schedule in Pakki.

Exam schedules

Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

Assessment methods and criteria

According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research

Learning materials

Required Textbook
Kotler, P., Armstrong, G., Harris, L. C., & He, H. (2020). Principles of marketing: 8th European edition.
Additional course material, such as blogs, videos, blogs, and short articles, will be provided in Moodle Workspace.

Student workload

According to the TAMK schedule, ECT credits, and Moodle timing instructions.
Students are expected to:
- Attend lessons
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Details are given in the first lesson

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Project work / case studies

International connections

Cases and discussion, global operational business environment, international collaborative projects.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can recognize and name the basic concepts of marketing. He/she can use the basic terms in a correct way and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted, work in a team and take responsibility for his/her own work.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to make a marketing plan accordingly. The student can select the most appropriate course of action from diverse options and justify his/her choice. The student has participated in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/hers knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student understands extensively the concepts and principles of marketing. The student is able to conduct a fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student combines different solution alternatives creatively or creates new ones. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active. The student cooperates responsibly, flexibly, and constructively.

Enrolment period

24.09.2023 - 23.10.2023

Timing

24.10.2023 - 31.12.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Salman Saleem
Person in charge

Salman Saleem

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course is an introduction to modern business marketing. It introduces basic marketing concepts, theories and language with a focus of understanding the role and the needs of the customer in consumer business and business-to-business marketing.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Demonstrate knowledge about the significance and role of marketing
in business management.
• Describe the value creation process for customers by understanding
customer needs.
• Demonstrate knowledge of modern marketing mix in theory and
practice.
• Write a marketing plan.

Content (course unit)

• What is modern multichannel marketing?
• What are examples of doing advertising, PR; personal selling and sales
promotion?
• How to do direct, online, social media and mobile marketing?
• What is sustainable marketing?
• How to write a marketing plan for a business and create website contents?

Prerequisites (course unit)

Introduction to Marketing 1

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can recognize and define the basics of modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix. He/she can use the basic terms and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted. The student takes responsibility of his/her own work and can work in a group.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student applies modern multichannel marketing and marketing mix in marketing planning accordingly and solves the problems associated with it. The student participates in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the outcome with his/her knowledge. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student understands the concepts and principles of marketing extensively. The student is able to conduct fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. He/she assesses diverse solution alternatives in marketing planning. The individual contribution in the class and team has been especially active. The student works responsibly and in a committed manner.

Location and time

Sessions will be held according to the schedule in Pakki.

Exam schedules

Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

Assessment methods and criteria

According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

-Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research

Learning materials

Required Textbook
Kotler, P., Armstrong, G., Harris, L. C., & He, H. (2020). Principles of marketing: 8th European edition.
Additional course material, such as blogs, videos, blogs, and short articles, will be provided in Moodle Workspace.

Student workload

According to the TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions.
Students are expected to:
- Attend lessons
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Details are given in the first lesson

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Project work / case studies

International connections

Cases and discussion, global operational business environment, international collaborative projects.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can recognize and name the basic concepts of marketing. He/she can use the basic terms in a correct way and can define the principles of marketing. The student can perform the given tasks assisted, work in a team and take responsibility for his/her own work.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to make a marketing plan accordingly. The student can select the most appropriate course of action from diverse options and justify his/her choice. The student has participated in the teamwork and classes actively contributing to the final outcome with his/hers knowledge and ideas according to the peer evaluations. The student can cooperate responsibly and is ready to develop his/her interaction skills.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student understands extensively the concepts and principles of marketing. The student is able to conduct a fluent and reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning. The student combines different solution alternatives creatively or creates new ones. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active. The student cooperates responsibly, flexibly, and constructively.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 02.12.2024

Timing

01.01.2024 - 06.12.2024

Credits

2 op

Virtual portion

2 op

Mode of delivery

Distance learning

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sari Matala
Person in charge

Sari Matala

Groups
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

This online course introduces the practical issues involved in the final thesis process. The course concentrates on giving the students necessary information and competences to begin the final thesis process. This free-choice course should be completed before the student starts the writing process under the guidance of an assigned supervisor.


After completing the course, the student will be able to:
Describe the different forms of final thesis as well as the principles of thesis assessment in TAMK.
Use the guides and instructions helping and regulating the final thesis process.
Apply the basic research approaches applicable in BBA theses.
Write a topic analysis with an appropriate form of thesis, literature review and frame of reference.
Manage his/her final thesis process.

Content (course unit)

What does the concept of applied research mean?
What are the main research methods for applied research?
How does the final thesis process go in practice?

Assessment criteria, pass/fail (course unit)

Pass:
The student can explain the concept of applied research, understands the objectivity of a research and is able to justify the basic principles of a good research. He/she can apply a suitable quantitative or qualitative approach, including a variation of data collection methods, in his/her own thesis process. The student can give constructive feedback.

Fail:
The student fails to recognize the principles of an applied research and cannot define any valid research question nor research objectives on his/her own field. He/she cannot manage the assigned tasks even under supervision and his/her interaction skills are not satisfactory.

Location and time

Enrolling December 2023 - Spring semester 2024.

Exam schedules

No exam

Assessment methods and criteria

Essay writing
Assessment is passed/failed

Assessment scale

Pass/Fail

Teaching methods

Online course with essay tasks (3 essays)

Learning materials

See Moodle course

Student workload

Spring semester 2024 and autumn 2024 (Check tasks in Moodle course!) Student is able to proceed with tasks in his/her own pace within a year. Dead line for submitting tasks is 1.12.2024.

Content scheduling

Spring semester 2024 and Autumn 2024 (Check tasks in Moodle course!) Student is able to proceed with tasks in his/her own pace within a year. Dead line for submitting tasks is 1.12.2024.

Completion alternatives

None

Practical training and working life cooperation

-

International connections

-

Further information

This course must be conducted before starting the thesis process.
Assessment is passed/failed
Student is able to proceed with tasks in his/her own pace within a year. Dead line for submitting tasks is 1.12.2024.

Assessment criteria - pass/fail (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Approved essays according to task descriptions applying academic writing with references. See Tamk report Guide for writing.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 18.01.2024

Timing

19.01.2024 - 23.02.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Jarmo Tuominiemi
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

The course introduces the basics of Logistics and Supply Chain Management operations. The course will focus on the business and humanitarian (emergency) sides of SCM. The students will learn the basics of procurement, inventory, warehousing and transportation processes, with full integration using ERP systems such as SAP AIl in One and Business One.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Describe the basic concepts and principles of logistics
• Manage the logistics process in a company using ERP systems transaction such as sales orders, purchase orders, order fulfilment, product issues and inventory control.

Content (course unit)

• What is Logistics and Supply Chain Management?
• How SCM works in services, industrial and humanitarian sectors?
• How to make and simulate real business activities in SAP?
• How SAP works and manages the business integration?
• What are the logistics costs and how to create value added services in SCM?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in supply chain management. The student has basic understanding of logistics in general and how it is connected to organisation's most common processes. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations regarding SCM. The student demonstrates basic skills by submitting required tasks and assignments during the course.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in (emergency) supply chain. The student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant working life SCM related situations. The student contributes according to teacher's expectations to tasks and assignments during the course.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in (emergency) supply chain. The student has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course. The student is also able to collect information from various nodes of SC and use the extracted information in SC planning, development and management, while streamlining it with proper managerial SCM-tools. The student can also use the acquired information as a basis for new, added value containing data creation. The student is able to capitalise on knowledge in the execution of organisation's daily SCM related processes.

Location and time

19.01: 08:00 - 11.00 in B3-27
26.01: 08:00 - 11.00 in B3-27
02.02: 08:00 - 11.00 in B3-27
09.02: 08:00 - 11.00 in B3-27
16.02: 08:00 - 11.00 in B3-27
23.02: 08:00 - 11.00 in B3-27

Exam schedules

Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

Assessment methods and criteria

Assigned tasks, report, exam, and participation will be evaluated.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped class sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Project- based learning
- Case- based learning

Learning materials

- Presentation material
- Assigned books
- Articles
- Case studies
- Video

Student workload

Students are expected to:
- Attend sessions
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Complete the final report and exam
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Themes for the course:
- Supply chain management- the big picture
- Service supply chains, strategy and processes
- Logistics, technology
- Humanitarian supply chain management and logistics
- Lean, JIT
- Risks and risk management

Sustainability topics will run parallel to the course themes.

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Knowledge gained from the course can be applied to various roles along the supply chain's functions.

International connections

Multiple global case studies will be used in the course

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 18.01.2024

Timing

19.01.2024 - 23.02.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Jarmo Tuominiemi
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

The course introduces the basics of Logistics and Supply Chain Management operations. The course will focus on the business and humanitarian (emergency) sides of SCM. The students will learn the basics of procurement, inventory, warehousing and transportation processes, with full integration using ERP systems such as SAP AIl in One and Business One.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Describe the basic concepts and principles of logistics
• Manage the logistics process in a company using ERP systems transaction such as sales orders, purchase orders, order fulfilment, product issues and inventory control.

Content (course unit)

• What is Logistics and Supply Chain Management?
• How SCM works in services, industrial and humanitarian sectors?
• How to make and simulate real business activities in SAP?
• How SAP works and manages the business integration?
• What are the logistics costs and how to create value added services in SCM?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in supply chain management. The student has basic understanding of logistics in general and how it is connected to organisation's most common processes. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations regarding SCM. The student demonstrates basic skills by submitting required tasks and assignments during the course.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in (emergency) supply chain. The student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. The student has a good level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student is capable of applying the acquired knowledge to relevant working life SCM related situations. The student contributes according to teacher's expectations to tasks and assignments during the course.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in (emergency) supply chain. The student has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of (humanitarian) logistics. The student demonstrates a high skill level, creates value and shares information with other participants. The student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations. The student actively contributes to tasks and assignments during the course. The student is also able to collect information from various nodes of SC and use the extracted information in SC planning, development and management, while streamlining it with proper managerial SCM-tools. The student can also use the acquired information as a basis for new, added value containing data creation. The student is able to capitalise on knowledge in the execution of organisation's daily SCM related processes.

Location and time

19.01: 11.00 - 14:00 in B3-27
26.01: 11.00 - 14:00 in B3-27
02.02: 11.00 - 14:00 in B3-27
09.02: 11.00 - 14:00 in B3-27
16.02: 11.00 - 14:00 in B3-27
23.02: 11.00 - 14:00 in B3-27

Exam schedules

Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

Assessment methods and criteria

Assigned tasks, report, exam, and participation will be evaluated.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped class sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Project- based learning
- Case- based learning

Learning materials

- Presentation material
- Assigned books
- Articles
- Case studies
- Video

Student workload

Students are expected to:
- Attend sessions
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Complete the final report and exam
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Themes for the course:
- Supply chain management- the big picture
- Service supply chains, strategy and processes
- Logistics, technology
- Humanitarian supply chain management and logistics
- Lean, JIT
- Risks and risk management

Sustainability topics will run parallel to the course themes.

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Knowledge gained from the course can be applied to various roles along the supply chain's functions.

International connections

Multiple global case studies will be used in the course

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 10.01.2024

Timing

01.01.2024 - 29.02.2024

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Shaidul Kazi
Person in charge

Shaidul Kazi

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

Culture is an integral part of everyday organizational life. Understanding culture facilitates organizational success in national- as well as international market. The course is designed to deal with culture and its impact in managing/leading organization made up of people from diverse cultural background.


After completing of the course, students will be able to:

Know culture from different points of view prioritizing the field of management and organization.

Lead multicultural workforce

Build work team/group with people from different cultural background

Deal with cultural differences effectively

Identify culture lenient motivational strategy

Manage cultural tension by engaging empathetic approach

Negotiate globally

Content (course unit)

What is culture?

What is family-, national-, organizational- and business culture?

What are the roots of culture?

How culture influences management and the functioning of an organization?

How to deal with cultural challenges in forming group/team and leading people with diverse cultural background?

What are the crucial issues to remember while negotiating internationally?

Prerequisites (course unit)

First year BBA studies or equivalent studies for the exchange students

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can define culture and recognises cultural differences. He/she is aware of the course load and able to do routine tasks. The student can give and receive feedback and can do project work in a group. He/she considers and assesses things from his/her viewpoints. The student can work in a group. He/she judges things mainly from his/her own perspective.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student compares culture and explains its impact on different social entities. He/she helps to apply cultural approach in leading a multicultural workforce. The student as a resource person assists in solving problems in leading a multicultural workforce or building a multicultural team. He/she helps making a plan for dealing with cultural differences effectively. He/she considers and assesses issues from multicultural perspectives and can engage in negotiation with counterparts from another culture. The student becomes a responsible member of a diverse group.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student understands culture from multiple perspectives and analyses its impact on different social entities including business organisations. The student as a resource person acts independently or as part of a group in leading a multicultural workforce or building a multicultural team. He/she assists in finding solutions to team in dealing with cultural differences effectively. He/she actively engages himself/herself in the work group in finding solutions to problems at hand or adopting policy regarding a culture lenient motivational plan. Moreover, the student can play a flexible role in multicultural negotiation context.

Location and time

Two online, two face-to-face lessons in January 2024 & three face-to-face teaching in February, 2024.

Exam schedules

No test but project, individual task & presentation

Assessment methods and criteria

Group project: 30%
Group project presentation: 10%
Presentation participation diary (Individual task): 10%
5 short individual tasks: 50%

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Online & face to face teaching|study conversation|individual task|project|presentation

Learning materials

Cultures and organizations : software of the mind : intercultural cooperation and its importance for survival, Hofstede, Geert, 2010 (suggested chapters)

The Culture Map: Decoding how people think, lead, and get things done across cultures. Erin Meyer (suggested chapters)
+
Lecture handouts & suggested reading

Student workload

Total time: 27x5 = 135 hours
Contact lesson 7 x 3: 21 hours
Project: 25 hours
Reading: 29 hours
Individual task & article note: 30 hours
Pre-assignment & online activity: 30 hours

Completion alternatives

Talk to the course teacher

Practical training and working life cooperation

Possible & welcome

International connections

Open

Further information

Lesson and own activity are crucial from the learning point of view

Enrolment period

06.02.2024 - 06.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 24.04.2024

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Salman Saleem
Person in charge

Salman Saleem

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

A minority of companies still rate their digital communications or customer communications at an advanced level. Instead they are still in the phase of transformation and development of their digital marketing capabilities. This course is not only about digital marketing – it is about marketing in a digital world. It will give the students skills in planning and executing digital marketing. The key question is: how can companies, both BtoC and BtoB, benefit from digitalizing their marketing operations.

The course consists of theory lectures and weekly exercises where some of the digital marketing tools are used in practice.

After completing the course the students will be able to
• describe and explain the various forms of digital marketing and
social media
• design a digital marketing roadmap for a company
• use the tools of social media in business to establish a social
media marketing campaing
• create basic web pages, a blog or an online shop

Content (course unit)

What is digital marketing?
What are the opportunities and threats of digital marketing?
What are the digital marketing media and tools?
How can a company enter the digital world in a structured and planned way?

Prerequisites (course unit)

Introduction to Marketing or equivalent

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student has introductory knowledge of digital marketing practices but lacks an active role in creating and publishing content for the purpose. In a team his/her role is merely passive and he/she requires help from others to cope with his/her own tasks.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has basic knowledge of digital marketing and is able to independently take responsibility of his/her own learning as well as support other team members. He/she is an active contributor to the team, is able to understand and use social media channels for digital marketing and can provide good digital content to engage customers.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has advanced knowledge of digital marketing tools, is independent, takes full responsibility of his/her own learning and helps other team members to succeed. He/she understands well the dynamics of social media channels in marketing and is able to create attractive digital content to engage existing customers and attract new ones.

Location and time

Lessons according to the Pakki schedule

Exam schedules

N/A

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

The course will consist of live lessons on campus, individual assignments, team work, team presentations and an internal Instagram project. Teams will work on practical cases provided by external businesses in the areas of social media marketing plans and strategies, website assistance, etc. Internal Instagram project will serve as a tool to practce lessons learned (content creation, understanding the platform from a marketing perspective etc.).

- Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research

Learning materials

- Presentation material
- Articles
- Case studies
- Videos
- Assigned E-books

Student workload

The course will be intensive and carried out in one and half months calendar time. Students should be prepared for even load throughout the course.

Content scheduling

Contact days and internal project will discuss topical digital marketing areas. External customer project will run parallel.

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Cooperation with external businesses

International connections

Some of the teams may have cases from abroad.

Further information

N/A

Enrolment period

14.08.2023 - 22.10.2023

Timing

24.10.2023 - 15.12.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

Business and Media

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Salla Nieminen
  • Cristian Burr Raty
Person in charge

Cristian Burr Raty

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This straightforward exercise based course provides the students with information and hands-on skills of selected fundamental parts of business mathematics.

The time value of money theory forms the foundation of the course. The predetermined main objectives for the students are to learn to apply the theory, solve problems and communicate the problems, their solutions as well as the achieved new understanding effectively.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Identify opportunities for mathematical problem solving involved with the time value of money concept and theory.
• Find out the present and future values of invested money in different cases of compounding.
• Compare interest rates, returns on investments and cash flows utilizing the effective rate, present value and net present value concepts.
• Find out the present and future value as well as the periodic payment of an ordinary annuity.
• Prepare simple loan amortization schedules and calculate amortizations in MS Excel.
• Communicate mathematical problems, their solutions and interpretations briefly and informatively.

Content (course unit)

• What are the simple interest, growth percentage and sum of sequence all about?
• How are various compound interest and effective rate calculations solved?
• How are the present value and net present value (NPV) determined?
• What different types of annuities are there, and how are the periodic payment and the present and future values of an ordinary annuity determined?
• How can loan amortization schedules be prepared and loans become amortized?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of mathematics of finance. The student can solve basic level compound interest and present value problems. The student can take responsibility for any of his individual duties in routine mathematics of finance activities and is able to make some contribution in a group.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has the competence of explaining the concepts and methods of mathematics of finance and applying them in cases of reasonable difficulty. The student works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve compound interest, present value and annuity exercises and problems as well as interpret the answers for the benefit of business projects and activities. His/her courses of action are well justified.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can analyse mathematics of business exercises and work on related business cases
individually. The student is able to choose approaches and construct equations and formulas applying the assigned mathematics of finance theory skillfully. The student can produce analyses and correct solutions to compound interest, present value and annuity problems as well as interpret the answers profoundly for the benefit of business projects and activities. The student’s courses of action are very well justified, and he/she makes noticeable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly in a committed manner.

Location and time

Independent studying, Online kick off and 2 tutoring sessions. Moodle exam.

Exam schedules

Moodle exam (date notified in Moodle). Retake dates will be notified later.

Assessment methods and criteria

Evaluation will be based on the submitted exercises and the final exam.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Exercises independently and tutoring sessions in the classroom.

Learning materials

To be shared in the Moodle page of the course.

Student workload

2 credits = ca 53 hours of work.

Content scheduling

See contents and course objectives. The schedule will be published in Moodle.

Completion alternatives

Course can be completed independently. Two optional tutoring and recap sessions will be organized before the Moodle exam.

Enrolment period

14.08.2023 - 22.10.2023

Timing

24.10.2023 - 15.12.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

Business and Media

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Salla Nieminen
  • Cristian Burr Raty
Person in charge

Cristian Burr Raty

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This straightforward exercise based course provides the students with information and hands-on skills of selected fundamental parts of business mathematics.

The time value of money theory forms the foundation of the course. The predetermined main objectives for the students are to learn to apply the theory, solve problems and communicate the problems, their solutions as well as the achieved new understanding effectively.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Identify opportunities for mathematical problem solving involved with the time value of money concept and theory.
• Find out the present and future values of invested money in different cases of compounding.
• Compare interest rates, returns on investments and cash flows utilizing the effective rate, present value and net present value concepts.
• Find out the present and future value as well as the periodic payment of an ordinary annuity.
• Prepare simple loan amortization schedules and calculate amortizations in MS Excel.
• Communicate mathematical problems, their solutions and interpretations briefly and informatively.

Content (course unit)

• What are the simple interest, growth percentage and sum of sequence all about?
• How are various compound interest and effective rate calculations solved?
• How are the present value and net present value (NPV) determined?
• What different types of annuities are there, and how are the periodic payment and the present and future values of an ordinary annuity determined?
• How can loan amortization schedules be prepared and loans become amortized?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of mathematics of finance. The student can solve basic level compound interest and present value problems. The student can take responsibility for any of his individual duties in routine mathematics of finance activities and is able to make some contribution in a group.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has the competence of explaining the concepts and methods of mathematics of finance and applying them in cases of reasonable difficulty. The student works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve compound interest, present value and annuity exercises and problems as well as interpret the answers for the benefit of business projects and activities. His/her courses of action are well justified.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can analyse mathematics of business exercises and work on related business cases
individually. The student is able to choose approaches and construct equations and formulas applying the assigned mathematics of finance theory skillfully. The student can produce analyses and correct solutions to compound interest, present value and annuity problems as well as interpret the answers profoundly for the benefit of business projects and activities. The student’s courses of action are very well justified, and he/she makes noticeable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly in a committed manner.

Location and time

Independent studying, Online kick off and 2 tutoring sessions. Moodle exam.

Exam schedules

Moodle exam (date notified in Moodle). Retake dates will be notified later.

Assessment methods and criteria

Evaluation will be based on the submitted exercises and the final exam.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Exercises independently and tutoring sessions in the classroom.

Learning materials

To be shared in the Moodle page of the course.

Student workload

2 credits = ca 53 hours of work.

Content scheduling

See contents and course objectives. The schedule will be published in Moodle.

Completion alternatives

Course can be completed independently. Two optional tutoring and recap sessions will be organized before the Moodle exam.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 09.01.2024

Timing

01.01.2024 - 06.03.2024

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Toni Lehtimäki
  • Päivi Mayor
Person in charge

Toni Lehtimäki

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The course is focused on contemporary leadership theories, practices and skills that are needed to lead oneself and others ethically and effectively in a fast changing business environment.

After completing of the course, students will be able to:
1) define the role and responsibilities of a manager and leader in different organisations
2) understand their individual life motives that impact their leadership behaviour
3) create strategies for motivating and leading others in different situations
4) apply some essential leadership theories and practices in a fast changing environment
5) help other succeed by using some coaching techniques

Content (course unit)

- Motivation theories and 16 life motives
- Leading yourself & stress management
- Modern leadership theories, practices and styles
- Change management
- Coaching skills

Prerequisites (course unit)

First year BBA studies

Further information (course unit)

Main learning methods are practical exercises and skills training with other students. Presence in lectures is required.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student defines the role and the responsibilities of a manager and a leader. He/she has a vague knowledge of his/her own individual life motives and superficial understanding about motivating and leading others. With the help of others, he/she can solve simple people-related problems using some of the leadership theories and practices. The student is able to apply some very basic coaching skills to certain extent. He/she can give feedback but mainly considers and assesses things from his/her own point of view without being able to assess his/her own behaviour critically or showing strong empathy towards others.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student explains the role and the responsibilities of a manager and a leader. He/she identifies some of his/her individual life motives and is able to draw conclusions to his/her actions based on the information. The student applies usual strategies for motivating and leading others. He/she can solve some people-related problems with the help of the most common leadership theories and practices. The student is able to apply some coaching skills but still needs a lot of practice to help others develop better. He/she can give feedback actively and constructively but is not very well able to assess his/her own leadership behaviour critically.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student understands the role and the responsibilities of a manager and a leader. He/she analyses his/her own actions and behaviours with the help of his/her individual life motives. The student creates new strategies for motivating and leading others. He/she combines leadership theories and practices for solving challenging people-related cases. The student is able to apply some coaching skills in a professional manner. He/she uses feedback systematically to help others develop and is able to assess his/her own leadership behaviour critically.

Location and time

09.01.2024 12.00 - 14.00 B5-20
Introduction of the course, team building, leading a team

16.1.2024 11.00 - 14.00 B5-20
Leadership theories, Leadership practices, line management

• 23.1.2024 11.00 - 14.00 B5-20
Leading yourself, model the way

• 30.1.2024 11.00 - 14.00 B5-20
Inspire a shared vision & Encourage the heart: Motivation

• 6.2.2024 11.00 - 14.00 B5-20
Enable others to act: Changing individual behaviour, giving and receiving feedback / Coaching skills

•13.2.2024 11.00 - 14.00 B5-20
Challenge the process: Leading change (students are responsible)

•20.2.2024 11.00 - 14.00 B5-20 or Online (it is up to team)
GROUP EXAM (Online or Campus it is up to team)

Exam schedules

20.2.2024 11.00 – 14.00 Online Group Exam

Assessment methods and criteria

1) Open book group exam "Challenging leadership cases" - Grading: 0-5
The group exam consists of several realistic cases where the students can apply their knowledge about different aspects of leadership. The cases will be solved in small teams that are created in the beginning of the course.
2) Individual "My Leadership Handbook" - Grading: 0-5
The handbook is good (3) if
• Lectures and discussions are clearly utilized
• Three of the suggested sources have been used
• The topics have been reflected through the person's own life and/or work experiences
• Peer group feedback has been used for the final version of the Handbook¨
• References have been used and marked correctly
3) Group Presentations / Teaching sessions -Grading 0-5

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Interactive lectures
Reading
Exercises
Group exam
Writing "My Leadership Handbook"

Learning materials

Kouzes and Posner - The Leadership Challenge
Cameron and Green - Making Sense of Change Management
Articles and other resources as given during the lectures

Student workload

135 hours, 5 cr, consisting of about 20 hours of face-to-face lectures and over 100 hours of individual and group work

Practical training and working life cooperation

This course will build on the students' current and previous practical leadership experiences.

International connections

International cases will be used.

Further information

In the group exam, references need to be used due to Chat GBT. Hence, the students need to show where the information has been taken.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 09.01.2024

Timing

09.01.2024 - 06.03.2024

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Toni Lehtimäki
  • Päivi Mayor
Person in charge

Toni Lehtimäki

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The course is focused on contemporary leadership theories, practices and skills that are needed to lead oneself and others ethically and effectively in a fast changing business environment.

After completing of the course, students will be able to:
1) define the role and responsibilities of a manager and leader in different organisations
2) understand their individual life motives that impact their leadership behaviour
3) create strategies for motivating and leading others in different situations
4) apply some essential leadership theories and practices in a fast changing environment
5) help other succeed by using some coaching techniques

Content (course unit)

- Motivation theories and 16 life motives
- Leading yourself & stress management
- Modern leadership theories, practices and styles
- Change management
- Coaching skills

Prerequisites (course unit)

First year BBA studies

Further information (course unit)

Main learning methods are practical exercises and skills training with other students. Presence in lectures is required.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student defines the role and the responsibilities of a manager and a leader. He/she has a vague knowledge of his/her own individual life motives and superficial understanding about motivating and leading others. With the help of others, he/she can solve simple people-related problems using some of the leadership theories and practices. The student is able to apply some very basic coaching skills to certain extent. He/she can give feedback but mainly considers and assesses things from his/her own point of view without being able to assess his/her own behaviour critically or showing strong empathy towards others.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student explains the role and the responsibilities of a manager and a leader. He/she identifies some of his/her individual life motives and is able to draw conclusions to his/her actions based on the information. The student applies usual strategies for motivating and leading others. He/she can solve some people-related problems with the help of the most common leadership theories and practices. The student is able to apply some coaching skills but still needs a lot of practice to help others develop better. He/she can give feedback actively and constructively but is not very well able to assess his/her own leadership behaviour critically.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student understands the role and the responsibilities of a manager and a leader. He/she analyses his/her own actions and behaviours with the help of his/her individual life motives. The student creates new strategies for motivating and leading others. He/she combines leadership theories and practices for solving challenging people-related cases. The student is able to apply some coaching skills in a professional manner. He/she uses feedback systematically to help others develop and is able to assess his/her own leadership behaviour critically.

Location and time

09.01.2024 14.00 - 17.00 B5-20
Introduction of the course, team building, leading a team

16.1.2024 14.00 - 17.00 B5-20
Leadership theories, Leadership practices, line management

• 23.1.2024 14.00 - 17.00 B5-20
Leading yourself, model the way

• 30.1.2024 14.00 - 17.00 B5-20
Inspire a shared vision & Encourage the heart: Motivation

• 6.2.2024 14.00 - 17.00 B5-20
Enable others to act: Changing individual behaviour, giving and receiving feedback / Coaching skills

•13.2.2024 14.00 - 17.00 B5-20
Challenge the process: Leading change (students are responsible)

•20.2.2024 14.00 - 17.00 B5-20 or Online (it is up to team)
GROUP EXAM (Online or Campus it is up to team)

Exam schedules

20.2.2024 14.00 - 17.00 Online Group Exam

Assessment methods and criteria

1) Open book group exam "Challenging leadership cases" - Grading: 0-5
The group exam consists of several realistic cases where the students can apply their knowledge about different aspects of leadership. The cases will be solved in small teams that are created in the beginning of the course.
2) Individual "My Leadership Handbook" - Grading: 0-5
The handbook is good (3) if
• Lectures and discussions are clearly utilized
• Three of the suggested sources have been used
• The topics have been reflected through the person's own life and/or work experiences
• Peer group feedback has been used for the final version of the Handbook¨
• References have been used and marked correctly
3) Group Presentations / Teaching sessions -Grading 0-5

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Interactive lectures
Reading
Exercises
Group exam
Writing "My Leadership Handbook"

Learning materials

Kouzes and Posner - The Leadership Challenge
Cameron and Green - Making Sense of Change Management
Articles and other resources as given during the lectures

Student workload

135 hours, 5 cr, consisting of about 20 hours of face-to-face lectures and over 100 hours of individual and group work

Practical training and working life cooperation

This course will build on the students' current and previous practical leadership experiences.

International connections

International cases will be used.

Further information

In the group exam, references need to be used due to the Chat GBT. Hence, the students need to show where the information has been taken.

Enrolment period

08.06.2023 - 30.08.2023

Timing

29.08.2023 - 10.10.2023

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Katri Koli
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

Operations Management (OM) is a discipline that applies to restaurants, cafe as well as to factories like Ford and Whirlpool. The techniques of OM apply throughout the world to virtualyy all productive enterprise. It doesn't matter if the application is in an office, a hospital, a restaurant, a department store, or a factory- the production of goods and services requires operations management. The course covers the basic aspects of OM including operations in services and production.

After completing the course, students will be able to:
- Manage the operations and processes in services and production

- Calculate the productivity and labour-productivity

- know how to design a service and product in order to minimize the inventory cost and design an optimal Supply Chain (Sustainable design )

- Know the forecasting methods

- Know the techniques of Material Requirement Planning

Content (course unit)

Operations and Productivity

- Forecasting

- Design of goods and services

- Aggregate Planning and MRP

- JIT, SCORE Model and Lean Operations

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to recognise and analyse the organisation's processes and understand the basic principles of how they work together. The student understands the basic methodology of how to improve the processes' efficiency and their added value to both internal and external stakeholders. The student understands the importance of various, relevant stakeholders and the way how the information they each represent needs to be connected in order for the entire organisation to operate soundly. The student has a limited ability to plan and steer the organisation's processes.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to map the entire organisation's processes and the way they connect and interact with each other, as both internal and external stakeholders. The student knows several relevant tools which he/she can independently apply in various operations management situations. The student knows how and from where to acquire the necessary systemic information in order to analyse, improve and manage the organisation's processes. The student is capable of adapting to changed requirements depending on which of the life-cycle stages the concerned processes are currently in. The student also understands how the processes are linked to the management supporting ERP-systems.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to plan, erect and manage any of the organisation's processes and to apply relevant tools where necessary. The student also knows how to manage the entity of organisation's processes and operations effectively. The student can question any of organisation's operation and focus his/hers attention on relevant attributes in order to improve their overall performance. The student also understands the meaning of channel separation and can apply this both when summoning information and capitalising on the collected information on practical level. The student can also benchmark an organisation and its processes, detecting pertinent bottlenecks or improvement areas. The student possesses also basic managerial strategic knowledge regarding execution of operations and processes.

Location and time

Blended learning approach, Sessions will be held on campus according to the schedule in Pakki. Meetings that are online will be announced in the class.

Exam schedules

Details given in the first class meeting

Assessment methods and criteria

According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research

Learning materials

- Presentation material
- Assigned books (Operations Management, Slack, Chambers et al, multiple versions)
- Articles and case studies
- Video

Student workload

According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions.
Students are expected to:
- Attend zoom sessions
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Complete the final report and exam
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Details given in the first lesson

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Project work / project case study

International connections

Cases and discussion, global operational business environment

Further information

N/A

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student participation has been on adequate level based on course schedule

Student has the basic understanding on Operations management in general

Student has demonstrated basic skills by submitting required tasks and asignments during the course

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student's participation has been active during contact lessons and online between lessons.

Student understands operative roles, tasks and challenges

Student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables

Student is capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has actively partipated and contributed to course implementation

Student has professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of operational model of different organisations

Student has demonstrated high skill level in operational management and created value and shared information to other partipants

Student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

Enrolment period

08.06.2023 - 30.08.2023

Timing

29.08.2023 - 10.10.2023

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Katri Koli
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

Operations Management (OM) is a discipline that applies to restaurants, cafe as well as to factories like Ford and Whirlpool. The techniques of OM apply throughout the world to virtualyy all productive enterprise. It doesn't matter if the application is in an office, a hospital, a restaurant, a department store, or a factory- the production of goods and services requires operations management. The course covers the basic aspects of OM including operations in services and production.

After completing the course, students will be able to:
- Manage the operations and processes in services and production

- Calculate the productivity and labour-productivity

- know how to design a service and product in order to minimize the inventory cost and design an optimal Supply Chain (Sustainable design )

- Know the forecasting methods

- Know the techniques of Material Requirement Planning

Content (course unit)

Operations and Productivity

- Forecasting

- Design of goods and services

- Aggregate Planning and MRP

- JIT, SCORE Model and Lean Operations

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to recognise and analyse the organisation's processes and understand the basic principles of how they work together. The student understands the basic methodology of how to improve the processes' efficiency and their added value to both internal and external stakeholders. The student understands the importance of various, relevant stakeholders and the way how the information they each represent needs to be connected in order for the entire organisation to operate soundly. The student has a limited ability to plan and steer the organisation's processes.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to map the entire organisation's processes and the way they connect and interact with each other, as both internal and external stakeholders. The student knows several relevant tools which he/she can independently apply in various operations management situations. The student knows how and from where to acquire the necessary systemic information in order to analyse, improve and manage the organisation's processes. The student is capable of adapting to changed requirements depending on which of the life-cycle stages the concerned processes are currently in. The student also understands how the processes are linked to the management supporting ERP-systems.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to plan, erect and manage any of the organisation's processes and to apply relevant tools where necessary. The student also knows how to manage the entity of organisation's processes and operations effectively. The student can question any of organisation's operation and focus his/hers attention on relevant attributes in order to improve their overall performance. The student also understands the meaning of channel separation and can apply this both when summoning information and capitalising on the collected information on practical level. The student can also benchmark an organisation and its processes, detecting pertinent bottlenecks or improvement areas. The student possesses also basic managerial strategic knowledge regarding execution of operations and processes.

Location and time

Blended learning approach, Sessions will be held on campus according to the schedule in Pakki. Meetings that are online will be announced in the class.

Exam schedules

Details given in the first class meeting

Assessment methods and criteria

According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research

Learning materials

- Presentation material
- Assigned books (Operations Management, Slack, Chambers et al, multiple versions)
- Articles and case studies
- Video

Student workload

According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions.
Students are expected to:
- Attend zoom sessions
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Complete the final report and exam
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Details given in the first lesson

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Project work / project case study

International connections

Cases and discussion, global operational business environment

Further information

N/A

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student participation has been on adequate level based on course schedule

Student has the basic understanding on Operations management in general

Student has demonstrated basic skills by submitting required tasks and asignments during the course

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student's participation has been active during contact lessons and online between lessons.

Student understands operative roles, tasks and challenges

Student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables

Student is capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has actively partipated and contributed to course implementation

Student has professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of operational model of different organisations

Student has demonstrated high skill level in operational management and created value and shared information to other partipants

Student is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge in to relevant, working life situations

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 10.01.2024

Timing

10.01.2024 - 21.02.2024

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Katri Koli
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

Operations Management (OM) is a discipline that applies to restaurants, cafe as well as to factories like Ford and Whirlpool. The techniques of OM apply throughout the world to virtualyy all productive enterprise. It doesn't matter if the application is in an office, a hospital, a restaurant, a department store, or a factory- the production of goods and services requires operations management. The course covers the basic aspects of OM including operations in services and production.

After completing the course, students will be able to:
- Manage the operations and processes in services and production

- Calculate the productivity and labour-productivity

- know how to design a service and product in order to minimize the inventory cost and design an optimal Supply Chain (Sustainable design )

- Know the forecasting methods

- Know the techniques of Material Requirement Planning

Content (course unit)

Operations and Productivity

- Forecasting

- Design of goods and services

- Aggregate Planning and MRP

- JIT, SCORE Model and Lean Operations

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to recognise and analyse the organisation's processes and understand the basic principles of how they work together. The student understands the basic methodology of how to improve the processes' efficiency and their added value to both internal and external stakeholders. The student understands the importance of various, relevant stakeholders and the way how the information they each represent needs to be connected in order for the entire organisation to operate soundly. The student has a limited ability to plan and steer the organisation's processes.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to map the entire organisation's processes and the way they connect and interact with each other, as both internal and external stakeholders. The student knows several relevant tools which he/she can independently apply in various operations management situations. The student knows how and from where to acquire the necessary systemic information in order to analyse, improve and manage the organisation's processes. The student is capable of adapting to changed requirements depending on which of the life-cycle stages the concerned processes are currently in. The student also understands how the processes are linked to the management supporting ERP-systems.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to plan, erect and manage any of the organisation's processes and to apply relevant tools where necessary. The student also knows how to manage the entity of organisation's processes and operations effectively. The student can question any of organisation's operation and focus his/hers attention on relevant attributes in order to improve their overall performance. The student also understands the meaning of channel separation and can apply this both when summoning information and capitalising on the collected information on practical level. The student can also benchmark an organisation and its processes, detecting pertinent bottlenecks or improvement areas. The student possesses also basic managerial strategic knowledge regarding execution of operations and processes.

Location and time

Sessions on campus according to the schedule in Pakki. Some sessions might be online (announced separately).

Exam schedules

No exam

Assessment methods and criteria

Evaluation details presented in the first lecture

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Lectures, flipped learning, group work, individual study and reflection

Learning materials

Lecture materials available in Moodle
Course book: Operations Management by Slack et al (multiple versions available)

Student workload

4 x 27 hours consisting of
- attendance lectures and workshops
- active participation in group work
- individual study and reflection

Content scheduling

Initial plan (subject to change):
- Introduction
- Strategy
- Performance
- Manufacturing Environments
- Planning and Control
- Lean
- Case study presentations

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Project case study can relate to an existing company

International connections

Cases and discussion, global operational business environment

Further information

N/A

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 12.09.2023

Timing

01.08.2023 - 15.12.2023

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Elena Grigorova
Person in charge

Elena Grigorova

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course covers various aspects of organizational communication, including theoretical background and practical communication activities. It deals with written, verbal and non-verbal communication, focusing on clarity and appropriateness in all situations.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Demonstrate familiarity with theories of organizational communication.
• Adapt their communication style according to a range of interpersonal factors, such as relative status, degree of familiarity, and cultural norms.
• Use spoken English and non-verbal language effectively in face-to-face communication.
• Produce written English texts which meet set norms regarding lay-out, organization, and accuracy.
• Learn the basics of public relations

Content (course unit)

• What are the essentials for effective organizational communication?
• What are internal communications and public relations?
• With what communities, groups and individuals do organizations need to communicate?
• What factors affect the appropriate degree of formality and level of detail required in both face-to-face and written communication?
• What are the different channels, communication vehicles and activities needed?
• What discourse types and communication tools are typically used in organizational communication?
• How to measure success in communication?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can name the various participants in the communications process and describe communications theory. The student can identify internal and external communications and describe or illustrate the communications process. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present simple, factual information and follow templates to produce routine written communications content. The student is able to communicate in a business environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student can explain the role of participants and describe the processes of communications theory. The student can explain and apply communications processes to their own business simulation and develop internal and external communications strategies. The student can explain the communication principles of the public relations process, describe, and plan a communications process. The student is able to explain phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English and take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures. The student is able to present complex ideas and information, take account of and adjust communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates the ability to evaluate and adapt their communications approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new communications methods, channels and ideas.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can explain modern theories of communication, analyse the communications structures within an organization, design a public relations response to a business situation and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organization. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization, analyse communications issues and synthesise possible solutions and recognise possible implications. The student can collaborate with fellow learners during the learning process and evaluate different communications approaches. The student can improvise during a presentation to deal with unforeseen challenges and connect ideas and information from diverse sources and synthesis this to construct new understanding. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their communications as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values. He/she is open to new communication methods and ideas, including those driven by modern technological solutions. The student is able to adapt their communications techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

Location and time

On campus according to the timetable.

Exam schedules

- Please see Methods and Grounds for Evaluation.
- Further details will be provided in Moodle.

Assessment methods and criteria

The assessment is based on successful completion of the following tasks and activities:
- Internal Communication Scenarios - 25% (group task; self, peer & teacher evaluation)
- Communication Manual - 25% (group task; self, peer & teacher evaluation)
- Written Exam - 30% (individual task; teacher evaluation)
- Extension Tasks, Engagement and Course Participation - 20% (individual grade; teacher evaluation)

Grading rubrics will be provided for assessed tasks, and will be based on the principles of authentic learning and assessment and use the SOLO framework – “Structural Observation of Learning Outcomes” (Biggs and Collis, 1982, Biggs 1999).

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Lectures, discussions, group and individual work, independent study.
Some tasks are linked to activities in the professional development course (virtual firms).

Learning materials

- Materials in Moodle
- Student’s own research (enquiry based learning)

Student workload

Total hours: 3 cr x 27 h = 81 h
- Contact lessons 36 hours (12 x 3 h)
- Independent study 45 hours

Completion alternatives

If a student has completed corresponding studies at another university or university of applied sciences, the student may apply for credit transfer through HyväHot / CreTa system.

Students who have acquired relevant skills and competencies through extensive work experience may complete the course through demonstration of competencies.

Such cases have to be discussed with the course teacher at the beginning of the course, and students may be required to complete additional assignments to demonstrate their knowledge and skills.

Practical training and working life cooperation

The course is supportive of the professional development project the students are undertaking and is based on real life experience of working business and commerce.

International connections

The course will examine international organizational communication. Students will consider and reflect upon the impact and diversity of culture to organizational communications, using examples from the teacher and students' experiences.

Further information

- Mandatory attendance: 80%
- No hybrid option (some students on campus, some online).

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can name the various participants in the communications process and describe communications theory. The student can identify internal and external communications and describe or illustrate the communications process. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present simple, factual information and follow templates to produce routine written communications content. The student is able to communicate in a business environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can explain the role of participants and describe the processes of communications theory. The student can explain and apply communications processes to their own business simulation and develop internal and external communications strategies. The student can explain the communication principles of the public relations process, describe, and plan a communications process. The student is able to explain phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English and take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures. The student is able to present complex ideas and information, take account of and adjust communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates the ability to evaluate and adapt their communications approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new communications methods, channels and ideas.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can explain modern theories of communication, analyse the communications structures within an organization, design a public relations response to a business situation and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organization. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization, analyse communications issues and synthesise possible solutions and recognise possible implications. The student can collaborate with fellow learners during the learning process and evaluate different communications approaches. The student can improvise during a presentation to deal with unforeseen challenges and connect ideas and information from diverse sources and synthesis this to construct new understanding. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their communications as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values. He/she is open to new communication methods and ideas, including those driven by modern technological solutions. The student is able to adapt their communications techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 02.09.2023

Timing

01.08.2023 - 15.12.2023

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Elena Grigorova
Person in charge

Elena Grigorova

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course covers various aspects of organizational communication, including theoretical background and practical communication activities. It deals with written, verbal and non-verbal communication, focusing on clarity and appropriateness in all situations.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Demonstrate familiarity with theories of organizational communication.
• Adapt their communication style according to a range of interpersonal factors, such as relative status, degree of familiarity, and cultural norms.
• Use spoken English and non-verbal language effectively in face-to-face communication.
• Produce written English texts which meet set norms regarding lay-out, organization, and accuracy.
• Learn the basics of public relations

Content (course unit)

• What are the essentials for effective organizational communication?
• What are internal communications and public relations?
• With what communities, groups and individuals do organizations need to communicate?
• What factors affect the appropriate degree of formality and level of detail required in both face-to-face and written communication?
• What are the different channels, communication vehicles and activities needed?
• What discourse types and communication tools are typically used in organizational communication?
• How to measure success in communication?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can name the various participants in the communications process and describe communications theory. The student can identify internal and external communications and describe or illustrate the communications process. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present simple, factual information and follow templates to produce routine written communications content. The student is able to communicate in a business environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student can explain the role of participants and describe the processes of communications theory. The student can explain and apply communications processes to their own business simulation and develop internal and external communications strategies. The student can explain the communication principles of the public relations process, describe, and plan a communications process. The student is able to explain phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English and take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures. The student is able to present complex ideas and information, take account of and adjust communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates the ability to evaluate and adapt their communications approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new communications methods, channels and ideas.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can explain modern theories of communication, analyse the communications structures within an organization, design a public relations response to a business situation and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organization. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization, analyse communications issues and synthesise possible solutions and recognise possible implications. The student can collaborate with fellow learners during the learning process and evaluate different communications approaches. The student can improvise during a presentation to deal with unforeseen challenges and connect ideas and information from diverse sources and synthesis this to construct new understanding. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their communications as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values. He/she is open to new communication methods and ideas, including those driven by modern technological solutions. The student is able to adapt their communications techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

Location and time

On campus according to the timetable.

Exam schedules

- Please see Methods and Grounds for Evaluation.
- Further details will be provided in Moodle.

Assessment methods and criteria

The assessment is based on successful completion of the following tasks and activities:
- Internal Communication Scenarios - 25% (group task; self, peer & teacher evaluation)
- Communication Manual - 25% (group task; self, peer & teacher evaluation)
- Written Exam - 30% (individual task; teacher evaluation)
- Extension Tasks, Engagement and Course Participation - 20% (individual grade; teacher evaluation)

Grading rubrics will be provided for assessed tasks, and will be based on the principles of authentic learning and assessment and use the SOLO framework – “Structural Observation of Learning Outcomes” (Biggs and Collis, 1982, Biggs 1999).

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Lectures, discussions, group and individual work, independent study.
Some tasks are linked to activities in the professional development course (virtual firms).

Learning materials

- Materials in Moodle
- Student’s own research (enquiry based learning)

Student workload

Total hours: 3 cr x 27 h = 81 h
- Contact lessons 36 hours (12 x 3 h)
- Independent study 45 hours

Completion alternatives

If a student has completed corresponding studies at another university or university of applied sciences, the student may apply for credit transfer through HyväHot / CreTa system.

Students who have acquired relevant skills and competencies through extensive work experience may complete the course through demonstration of competencies.

Such cases have to be discussed with the course teacher at the beginning of the course, and students may be required to complete additional assignments to demonstrate their knowledge and skills.

Practical training and working life cooperation

The course is supportive of the professional development project the students are undertaking and is based on real life experience of working business and commerce.

International connections

The course will examine international organizational communication. Students will consider and reflect upon the impact and diversity of culture to organizational communications, using examples from the teacher and students' experiences.

Further information

- Mandatory attendance: 80%
- No hybrid option (some students on campus, some online).

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can name the various participants in the communications process and describe communications theory. The student can identify internal and external communications and describe or illustrate the communications process. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present simple, factual information and follow templates to produce routine written communications content. The student is able to communicate in a business environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can explain the role of participants and describe the processes of communications theory. The student can explain and apply communications processes to their own business simulation and develop internal and external communications strategies. The student can explain the communication principles of the public relations process, describe, and plan a communications process. The student is able to explain phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English and take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures. The student is able to present complex ideas and information, take account of and adjust communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates the ability to evaluate and adapt their communications approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new communications methods, channels and ideas.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can explain modern theories of communication, analyse the communications structures within an organization, design a public relations response to a business situation and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organization. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization, analyse communications issues and synthesise possible solutions and recognise possible implications. The student can collaborate with fellow learners during the learning process and evaluate different communications approaches. The student can improvise during a presentation to deal with unforeseen challenges and connect ideas and information from diverse sources and synthesis this to construct new understanding. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their communications as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values. He/she is open to new communication methods and ideas, including those driven by modern technological solutions. The student is able to adapt their communications techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 10.01.2024

Timing

08.01.2024 - 22.02.2024

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 35

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Pasi Kuusijärvi
Person in charge

Pasi Kuusijärvi

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

This course offers the students a chance to enhance their knowledge and managerial skills of financial planning and control as well as performance measurement and evaluation to a professional level.

The course is based on modern management accounting methods, frameworks and practices, laying a solid foundation on which continuing business studies and a serious business career in the field of accounting and finance can be built later on. The contents and learning experiences of the course are planned to be useful and generally applicable for every business professional.

After completing the course, students will be able to:

Prepare the major budgets of a company and participate in creation of budgeting systems.
Analyze business performance and participate in decision-making and business planning using standard budget reports.
Create business forecasts for the future, based on budget reports and other relevant business information.
Calculate the value of economic value added (EVA®) measure and utilize the DuPont approach to the return on investment (ROI) measure.
Participate in planning and implementing tailor-made strategic performance management solutions for various business cases.
Consider and try to include the effects of latest technological innovations and human aspects in any of their later business development projects.

Content (course unit)

Which budgets does a modern budgeting system – “The Master Budget” – include, and how can a tailored version be constructed?
How can the planning and control processes of a decentralized organization be managed using budgets, reports and supporting IT tools?
What different approaches are there for strategic performance measurement and evaluation?
What are the roles of human considerations, e.g. gaming, intangible assets and management myopia, as part of system creation?
How are the values of advanced measures such as economic value added (EVA®) calculated, and how can business reporting become more lively through visualization?
How can technology help in planning and control; what kind of insights do e.g. ERP systems, business intelligence and the current strong development of digitalization, mobile services and Internet of Things (IoT) offer to companies?
How is a strategy-bound performance management framework built and used in practice?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of financial planning and control as well as the performance measurement and evaluation theme sufficiently. He/she can take responsibility for his individual financial planning and reporting duties in routine activities, and is able to make some contribution in a group.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student achieves the competence of applying and explaining the concepts and methods of financial planning and control as well as the performance measurement and evaluation theme in controllable situations. He/she works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve financial planning and measurement problems, and his courses of action are well justified.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can analyse complex situations and produce alternative solution proposals to various financial planning and control as well as performance measurement and evaluation tasks and problems. He/she is able to apply his extensive knowledge and skills of the subject matter creatively in problem solving, solution tracing, new experiments, and when generalising his well-justified courses of action. The student can work strongly individually and make remarkable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly with excellent commitment.

Location and time

From Jan 8 to February 22, 2024.

The classes will be there at TAMK if not otherwise mentioned during the course.

Exam schedules

No written exam.

Assessment methods and criteria

Student’s overall course grade is based on
1. evaluation criteria of the course
2. active individual participation in the classes
3. performing all the assigned course exercises as instructed
4. his/her group assignment performance.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Learning discussions, group assignment(s), exercises, case studies, literature, lecturing.

Learning materials

Bhimani, A., Datar, S., Horngren, C.T. & Rajan, M. 2018. Management and Cost Accounting. 7th ed. Harlow, United Kingdom: Pearson Education. Chapters 14 and 18-21.
ISBN: 9781292232669. EISBN: 9781292232676.
https://andor.tuni.fi/permalink/358FIN_TAMPO/176jdvt/cdi_askewsholts_vlebooks_9781292232676

In addition, student groups also perform self-driven data collection, as part of their group assignment.

Student workload

Max. some 135 hours as workload; 18-20 hours of that as contact teaching classes.

Content scheduling

1. THE MASTER BUDGET
- Case: Ho-re-ca Business
2. STRATEGIC PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT AND EVALUATION
- EVA
- ROI DuPont
- The Balanced Scorecard (BSC)
3. GROUP ASSIGNMENT
- Objectives and Key Results (OKR) challenging The BSC.

Completion alternatives

No.

Practical training and working life cooperation

No, not in the winter 2024 implementation.

International connections

Neither guest lectures nor company visits or so in the winter 2024 implementation; a truly international group of students, anyway, studying together. The implementation group also includes a lot of double-degree and exchange students.

Further information

Pasi Kuusijärvi, M.Sc. (Econ. & Bus. Adm.), AmO, HHJ PJ
Senior Lecturer, Accounting and Financial Management

Tampere University of Applied Sciences (TAMK)
Tampere, Finland

pasi.kuusijarvi@tuni.fi
Tel. +358 40 846 3052
www.tuni.fi

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 31.12.2023

Timing

01.01.2024 - 31.12.2024

Credits

30 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Marita Tuomala
  • Janne Hopeela
Person in charge

Janne Hopeela

Groups
  • 22IB
  • 21IB

Objectives (course unit)

Practical training will familiarize the students in a supervised manner with the practical work assignments of the field studied as well as application of knowledge and skills in working life. In the International Business programme, the Finnish students look for a practical training place abroad, while the foreign students seek for a job in Finland.

The Practical Training (5 months = 30 credits) must be a full-time position. The training can be done in no more than two parts. The shortest accepted full-time position can be of one month in length. Before starting the practical training, the students will need to participate in a practical training orientation program, which will be arranged during the late autumn term of the second year. The student must contact the Practical Training Supervisor well in advance before the work placement and a written agreement on the practical training is required.

After and during the practical training, the students will be able to:
• learn the organizational culture of the employer and rules of the working life.
• apply learned theory and skills with practice.
• learn practicalities of the field studied.
• plan their career based on their practical training experience.
• create networks with the employer and the working life.
• collect ideas for the final thesis.

Content (course unit)

The contents include the followings:
• What does supervised practical training mean?
• What are the tasks of a BBA?
• How to act as a member of a work community?
• What are my strengths and ‘development areas’ in the working life?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, pass/fail (course unit)

Pass:

The student completes practical training for the required length in practical assignments in their field of study. He/she is able to apply the rules, knowledge and skills to their practical training. All the required documentation is submitted to the practical training supervisor and the feedback discussion takes place. The student is able to give and receive feedback and take responsibility of his/her own work.

Fail:
The student has does not complete the required length of practical training in their field of study. The required documents are not submitted to the supervisor, and no feedback discussion takes place with the practical training supervisor.

Location and time

During the 2nd or 3rd study year either in Finland or abroad

Exam schedules

No exam. Students are writing reports and weekly diaries during the practical training period.

Assessment methods and criteria

During the practical training TAMK BBA students are building their knowledge and practical skills in the field of their chosen mandatory module of the TAMK BBA programme. Evaluation is based on practical training reports and final discussion after the practical training period -> pass.

Assessment scale

Pass/Fail

Teaching methods

Before starting the practical training the students will need to participate in a Practical Training Orientation which will be arranged during the autumn term of the second study year. The student must contact the Practical Training Supervisor at TAMK well in advance before signing the practical training agreement. A written agreement is always required. Students will have a supervisor both in the company and at TAMK during their practical training. Students are writing reports and weekly diaries during the practical training period.

Learning materials

Guidelines for Practical Training are discussed during the Practical Training Orientation. Description of Practical Training can be found in IB Curriculum and more detailed guidelines in TAMK Intra, student's handbook.

Student workload

The practical training is 30 ECTS which equals 5 months of full-time work (20 working weeks). The practical training can be done in no more than two parts.

Completion alternatives

In case of accreditation of your previous work experience please contact either Ms. Tuomala or Mr. Hopeela

Practical training and working life cooperation

During the practical training period the students will learn the organizational culture of the employer and rules of the working life. Students will find the work placement themselves. Students are able to use TAMK's JobTeaser portal to find internships.

International connections

Finnish degree students are recommended to look for practical training positions abroad and foreign degree students either in Finland or abroad. We have some international connections; please contact your practical training supervisors.

Further information

For more information please contact either:
Marita Tuomala; marita.tuomala@tuni.fi or
Janne Hopeela; janne.hopeela@tuni.fi

Assessment criteria - pass/fail (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Pass - when all the required reports and a copy of the employment / internship certificate have been submitted to the practical training supervisor in Moodle and the feedback discussion has taken place between the student and the practical training supervisor at TAMK.

Enrolment period

08.01.2024 - 06.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 25.04.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 37

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Pasi Kuusijärvi
Person in charge

Pasi Kuusijärvi

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This two-part course provides the students with cornerstone level information of both product costing and pricing as well as financial closing analysis. Relevant theoretical accounting information is used as important supporting learning material. As the most important thing, anyway, the approach and mode of operations are truly practical all through the course.

The first part of the course introduces the product costing and pricing theme to the students. Key terms and concepts are defined, and the students learn to use especially their new job costing knowledge and skills by solving basic-level costing and pricing exercises. Studying the cost - volume - profit (C-V-P) analysis and the break-even analysis themes finishes the first part of the course.

The second part of the course has its focus on ready-made financial closing information and financial key ratios based on that. In this section, the students are supervised to have their own little research on both financial statements of some publicly traded company and their own practice firm. In addition to that, several most commonly applied financial key ratios under categories profitability, liquidity and solvency are introduced to the students, and they read about, interpret and solve the values of them in practice.


After completing the course, the students will be able to:

Solve basic-level product costing and pricing problems, using especially the job-costing method.
Perform C-V-P and break-even analyses, and use the analysis results in practice.
Participate in business planning and decision making, proving various decision makers with reliable product profitability information.
Read and interpret financial closing information of the income statements, balance sheets and cash flow statements.
Calculate the values of the most common profitability measures gross profit, operating profit, net profit, return on assets and return on equity.
Evaluate the performance of companies also based on liquidity measures such as working capital, current and quick ratio as well as turnovers of A/R and inventory.
Find out the debt and/or equity ratio of a company.
Measure, evaluate and analyze the financial performance of a company, using a many-sided set of financial key ratios.
Based on the analysis work done, decide on case-specific business planning issues.

Content (course unit)

What do the different numerous costing and pricing terms and concepts mean in practice?
How is product costing and pricing implemented in practice, applying job costing?
What other alternative costing and pricing methods are there, and when are they applicable?
How are the C-V-P and break-even analyses performed, and how can the analysis results be used in businesses?
What are the most meaningful and important pieces of information on the financial statements, and how can the income statement and balance sheet information be used in external decision making?
Which measures of profitability can be identified and easily used in practice?
What are the definitions and uses of different liquidity measures?
How is solvency measured; is it simply given as a part of financial closing, or can it be planned?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of product costing and financial closing analysis themes sufficiently. The student can take responsibility of his/her individual product costing and financial closing analysis duties in routine activities, and is able to make some contribution in a group.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has the competence of understanding and explaining the concepts and methods of the product costing and financial closing analysis themes, and can apply them in controllable situations. The student works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve product-costing problems and produce financial closing analyses, and his/her courses of action are well justified.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can analyse complex situations and produce alternative solution proposals to various product costing and financial closing analysis tasks and problems. The student is able to apply his/her knowledge and skills of the subject matter creatively in data collection, analyses and calculations, problem solving, and when interpreting and sharing his/her well-justified solutions. The student can work strongly individually and make remarkable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly with excellent commitment.

Location and time

From March 6 to April 24, 2024.

First class is at TAMK main campus in classroom B5-26 on March 6 at 11.15 a.m.

All the classes are at TAMK main campus, if not otherwise agreed during the course (approx. 1-2 classes might be changed to be online ones, if necessary).

Exam schedules

No written exam.

Assessment methods and criteria

Student’s overall course grade is based on
1. the evaluation criteria of this course
2. active individual participation in the classes
3. performance of the assigned exercises
4. his/her group assignment performance, including both the group's own report and action in an opposing team.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Learning discussions, group assignment(s), exercises, case studies, literature, lecturing.

Learning materials

Bhimani, A., Datar, S., Horngren, C.T. & Rajan, M. 2018. Management and Cost Accounting. 7th ed. Harlow, United Kingdom: Pearson Education. Chapters 1-3, 11 and selectively also 4-5.
ISBN: 9781292232669. EISBN: 9781292232676.
https://andor.tuni.fi/permalink/358FIN_TAMPO/176jdvt/cdi_askewsholts_vlebooks_9781292232676

https://www-kauppalehti-fi.libproxy.tuni.fi/porssi/kurssit/XHEL

In addition, student groups perform their own case-specific data collection, as part of their group assignment.

Student workload

Max. some 80 hours as workload; 15-18 hours of that as contact teaching.

Content scheduling

Studying product costing forms the first part of the course, studying financial closing analysis the second/last part.

Completion alternatives

No.

Practical training and working life cooperation

No.

International connections

Neither guest lectures nor company visits or so in spring 2024. A truly international group of students, anyway, studying together.

Further information

Pasi Kuusijärvi, M.Sc. (Econ. & Bus. Adm.), AmO, HHJ PJ
Senior Lecturer, Accounting and Financial Management

Tampere University of Applied Sciences (TAMK)
Tampere, Finland

pasi.kuusijarvi@tuni.fi

Enrolment period

08.01.2024 - 06.03.2024

Timing

04.03.2024 - 25.04.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 37

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Pasi Kuusijärvi
Person in charge

Pasi Kuusijärvi

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This two-part course provides the students with cornerstone level information of both product costing and pricing as well as financial closing analysis. Relevant theoretical accounting information is used as important supporting learning material. As the most important thing, anyway, the approach and mode of operations are truly practical all through the course.

The first part of the course introduces the product costing and pricing theme to the students. Key terms and concepts are defined, and the students learn to use especially their new job costing knowledge and skills by solving basic-level costing and pricing exercises. Studying the cost - volume - profit (C-V-P) analysis and the break-even analysis themes finishes the first part of the course.

The second part of the course has its focus on ready-made financial closing information and financial key ratios based on that. In this section, the students are supervised to have their own little research on both financial statements of some publicly traded company and their own practice firm. In addition to that, several most commonly applied financial key ratios under categories profitability, liquidity and solvency are introduced to the students, and they read about, interpret and solve the values of them in practice.


After completing the course, the students will be able to:

Solve basic-level product costing and pricing problems, using especially the job-costing method.
Perform C-V-P and break-even analyses, and use the analysis results in practice.
Participate in business planning and decision making, proving various decision makers with reliable product profitability information.
Read and interpret financial closing information of the income statements, balance sheets and cash flow statements.
Calculate the values of the most common profitability measures gross profit, operating profit, net profit, return on assets and return on equity.
Evaluate the performance of companies also based on liquidity measures such as working capital, current and quick ratio as well as turnovers of A/R and inventory.
Find out the debt and/or equity ratio of a company.
Measure, evaluate and analyze the financial performance of a company, using a many-sided set of financial key ratios.
Based on the analysis work done, decide on case-specific business planning issues.

Content (course unit)

What do the different numerous costing and pricing terms and concepts mean in practice?
How is product costing and pricing implemented in practice, applying job costing?
What other alternative costing and pricing methods are there, and when are they applicable?
How are the C-V-P and break-even analyses performed, and how can the analysis results be used in businesses?
What are the most meaningful and important pieces of information on the financial statements, and how can the income statement and balance sheet information be used in external decision making?
Which measures of profitability can be identified and easily used in practice?
What are the definitions and uses of different liquidity measures?
How is solvency measured; is it simply given as a part of financial closing, or can it be planned?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and use the concepts and methods of product costing and financial closing analysis themes sufficiently. The student can take responsibility of his/her individual product costing and financial closing analysis duties in routine activities, and is able to make some contribution in a group.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has the competence of understanding and explaining the concepts and methods of the product costing and financial closing analysis themes, and can apply them in controllable situations. The student works actively and cooperates responsibly and constructively both individually and in a group. The student can solve product-costing problems and produce financial closing analyses, and his/her courses of action are well justified.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can analyse complex situations and produce alternative solution proposals to various product costing and financial closing analysis tasks and problems. The student is able to apply his/her knowledge and skills of the subject matter creatively in data collection, analyses and calculations, problem solving, and when interpreting and sharing his/her well-justified solutions. The student can work strongly individually and make remarkable contribution to group work, cooperating responsibly, constructively and flexibly with excellent commitment.

Location and time

From March 6 to April 24, 2024.

First class is at TAMK main campus in classroom B5-26 on March 6 at 2.15 p.m.

All the classes are at TAMK main campus, if not otherwise agreed during the course (approx. 1-2 classes might be changed to be online ones, if necessary).

Exam schedules

No written exam.

Assessment methods and criteria

Student’s overall course grade is based on
1. the evaluation criteria of this course
2. active individual participation in the classes
3. performance of the assigned exercises
4. his/her group assignment performance, including both the group's own report and action in an opposing team.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Learning discussions, group assignment(s), exercises, case studies, literature, lecturing.

Learning materials

Bhimani, A., Datar, S., Horngren, C.T. & Rajan, M. 2018. Management and Cost Accounting. 7th ed. Harlow, United Kingdom: Pearson Education. Chapters 1-3, 11 and selectively also 4-5.
ISBN: 9781292232669. EISBN: 9781292232676.
https://andor.tuni.fi/permalink/358FIN_TAMPO/176jdvt/cdi_askewsholts_vlebooks_9781292232676

https://www-kauppalehti-fi.libproxy.tuni.fi/porssi/kurssit/XHEL

In addition, student groups perform their own case-specific data collection, as part of their group assignment.

Student workload

Max. some 80 hours as workload; 15-18 hours of that as contact teaching.

Content scheduling

Studying product costing forms the first part of the course, studying financial closing analysis the second/last part.

Completion alternatives

No.

Practical training and working life cooperation

No.

International connections

Neither guest lectures nor company visits or so in spring 2024. A truly international group of students, anyway, studying together.

Further information

Pasi Kuusijärvi, M.Sc. (Econ. & Bus. Adm.), AmO, HHJ PJ
Senior Lecturer, Accounting and Financial Management

Tampere University of Applied Sciences (TAMK)
Tampere, Finland

pasi.kuusijarvi@tuni.fi

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 12.09.2023

Timing

01.08.2023 - 31.05.2024

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

Business and Media

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Petteri Vilén
  • Elena Grigorova
  • Salman Saleem
  • Salman Saleem
Person in charge

Petteri Vilén

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course covers essential information on studying at TAMK IB programme. Professional Development course encourages the students to adopt a professional approach to their studies, and develop working habits appropriate to working life. As a practical approach students will study in teams who will set up a virtual company. Professional Development course includes weekly team meetings with assigned coach.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Know the contents of IB programme and TAMK learning environment
• Have a plan for completing their studies in the IB programme, taking into consideration their priorities, long-term goals, strengths and weaknesses.
• Know what self-motivated learning is and know how to develop teamwork skills in multicultural environment
• Know how to develop study skills, e.g. learning strategies and time management skills.
• Know the practical training process and how to apply for a job.
• Know how the international study exchange process works in practice.

Content (course unit)

• What regulations do all TAMK students need to follow?
• What requirements apply specifically to the International Business degree programme?
• What skills do I need to work in multicultural teams?
• How can I develop my study skills and manage my time better?
• What does supervised practical training mean?
• How do I plan my international study exchange?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to name teamwork roles and principles. The student recognises team development phases. The student can act as a team member. The student can give and receive feedback.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student applies teamwork principles in his/her own team behavior. The student is able to solve teamwork tasks and teamwork related problems. The student takes responsibility and commits to teamwork. The student develops his/her own teamwork skills.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student understands how effective team works in professional context. The student is able to adopt different team roles in various team tasks creatively. The student can cooperate responsibly, flexibly and constructively in a team. The student contributes actively to improve team’s performance and collective action.

Location and time

Professional Development sessions on Mondays from 11 am to 2 pm, in addition 2 team sessions according the set schedule.

Exam schedules

To be informed during the classes.

Assessment methods and criteria

Grading scale is 0-5.
The grading is based on student activity, attendance, punctuality, team peer evaluation and coach evaluation.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Tutorial coaching and teaching, team working, exercises, individual working.

Learning materials

The materials are to be distributed during the classes, during the fall and spring semester. Including books, articles, networking and other relevant sources.

Student workload

The course is running 4 periods, totally 4 credits, one credit on period basis.

Content scheduling

The Professional Development course content and themes are aligned with subject studies, following the periodical set up:
Period 1:Business environment
Period 2:Establishing a new business
Period 3:Towards profitable business
Period 4: International business and market development

Completion alternatives

To be defined by the coaches during the study year.

Practical training and working life cooperation

There are virtual firms to be established by the student teams, with assigned business connections as applicable.

International connections

Professional Development studies is internationally integrated course, with students from various regions.

Further information

petteri.vilen@tuni.fi
sean.morga@tuni.fi
elena.grigorova@tuni.fi
salman.saleem@tuni.fi

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 29.08.2023

Timing

29.08.2023 - 11.10.2023

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Jarmo Tuominiemi
  • Juha Tuominen
Person in charge

Juha Tuominen

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process.

After completing the course, the students will be able to

• Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment.
• Manage a sales process both in b-to-c and b-to-b sales situations.
• Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process.
• Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures.

Content (course unit)

• What are professional sales skills and techniques?
• How to sell successfully in b-to-c and b-to-b settings?
• What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
• How to sell and negotiate in other, selected countries?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

Assessment criteria, pass/fail (course unit)

Not approved 
The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process. 

Exam schedules

Weekly exams in different forms (assignments, games, reports, or other) will be announced in class.

Assessment methods and criteria

Weekly exams in different forms (assignments, games, reports, or other) will be announced in class.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures in the real classroom
- Independent studies based on provided materials
- Sales process simulation assignments and practice individually and with partners

Learning materials

Materials will be uploaded to the course Moodle page weekly.

Shared learning material in Moodle Presentations Articles Videos
Library for data collection (methods and links)
Models for process planning, implementation and evaluation.
Your own notes and remarks

Student workload

One study credit= 27 hours
4 credit class = 108 hours
21 hours of contact teaching
87 hours of individual work and group exerises

Content scheduling

Planned content
• What are professional sales skills and techniques?
• How to sell successfully in a b2c and/or b2b setting?
• What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
• How to sell and negotiate in other countries?

Practical training and working life cooperation

The guest speakers might be visiting during class time.

International connections

A view of the assessment of European sales competition (ESC)

Further information

You will be guided through learning process by Juha Tuominen and Jarmo Tuominiemi. During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process. Subject theory runs parallel with the implementation of practical training.

After completing the course, the student will be able to:
- Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment
- Manage a sales process both in b2c and b2b sales situations
- Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process
- Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures
- Understand the importance of necessary preparation work before contacting prospects
- Fit the offering into the needs of targeted markets and clients
- Evaluate, choose and use correct sales and negotiation techniques in various sales situations
- Measure, analyze and improve personal sales skills

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 08.01.2024

Timing

08.01.2024 - 20.02.2024

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Jarmo Tuominiemi
  • Juha Tuominen
Person in charge

Juha Tuominen

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process.

After completing the course, the students will be able to

• Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment.
• Manage a sales process both in b-to-c and b-to-b sales situations.
• Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process.
• Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures.

Content (course unit)

• What are professional sales skills and techniques?
• How to sell successfully in b-to-c and b-to-b settings?
• What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
• How to sell and negotiate in other, selected countries?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

Assessment criteria, pass/fail (course unit)

Not approved 
The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process. 

Exam schedules

Weekly exams in different forms (assignments, games, reports, or other) will be announced in class.

Assessment methods and criteria

Weekly exams in different forms (assignments, games, reports, or other) will be announced in class.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures in the real classroom
- Independent studies based on provided materials
- Sales process simulation assignments and practice individually and with partners

Learning materials

Materials will be uploaded to the course Moodle page weekly.

Shared learning material in Moodle Presentations Articles Videos
Library for data collection (methods and links)
Models for process planning, implementation and evaluation.
Your own notes and remarks

Student workload

One study credit= 27 hours
4 credit class = 108 hours
21 hours of contact teaching
87 hours of individual work and group exerises

Content scheduling

Planned content
• What are professional sales skills and techniques?
• How to sell successfully in a b2c and/or b2b setting?
• What kind of digital tools are used in selling?
• How to sell and negotiate in other countries?

Practical training and working life cooperation

The guest speakers might be visiting during class time.

International connections

A view of the assessment of European sales competition (ESC)

Further information

You will be guided through learning process by Juha Tuominen and Jarmo Tuominiemi. During the course students will learn different techniques and skills for improving their professional sales skills. The student will study different approaches for sales situations and negotiations as well as gain their understanding of sales process. Subject theory runs parallel with the implementation of practical training.

After completing the course, the student will be able to:
- Communicate and negotiate in a demanding business environment
- Manage a sales process both in b2c and b2b sales situations
- Understand the role and usage of digital tools in a sales process
- Know how to prepare and handle sales situations across cultures
- Understand the importance of necessary preparation work before contacting prospects
- Fit the offering into the needs of targeted markets and clients
- Evaluate, choose and use correct sales and negotiation techniques in various sales situations
- Measure, analyze and improve personal sales skills

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student has poor skills of conducting sales negotiations. The student is unaware of basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is unfamiliar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student is unable to give sales presentations. He/she does not know how to close sales. The student is unaware of digital tools used in the sales process.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in different target markets. The student knows basic techniques for understanding customer needs. He/she is somewhat familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can give simple sales presentations. He/she knows how to close sales in some situations. The student is aware of digital tools used in the sales process.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to conduct sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in different target markets. The student can ask questions to understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with the methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in enduring buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar with digital tools in the sales process.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to conduct complex sales negotiations in both B2B and B2C settings in domestic and international target markets. The student can ask the right questions to fully understand customer needs. He/she is familiar with different persuasion techniques used in professional selling. The student understands the role of social influence in sales settings and he/she can identify sales prospects. The student can make professional sales presentations and is familiar with various methods of overcoming sales resistance. He/she knows how to close sales, resulting in long-lasting and mutual beneficial buyer-seller relationships. The student is familiar and able to use diverse digital tools in the sales process.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 10.09.2023

Timing

30.08.2023 - 18.12.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Teaching languages
  • Finnish
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sari Hanska
Person in charge

Sari Hanska

Groups
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

On this course students will learn about the professional business communication in working life environment. European Framework of Reference for Languages B1 level.

After completing the course students will be able to
- tell about their personality, education, work experience, tasks and duties at work by using professional Swedish
- meet customers’ needs when servicing the customer base and communicating with interest groups
- follow and participate in the development of their field by using different ways of communication (media, conferences, literature).

Content (course unit)

What can the student communicate on his/her competence and working life environment in the target language?
What kind of qualifications does the student need to succeed in multicultural customer-based interaction in the target language?
How can the student develop his/her competence and acquire business-related information in the target language?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information about a company, product and services. He/she communicates in expected oral work life situations but requires help. The student interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone) and recognises the characteristics of Nordic operational environment. The student interprets the main points of publications of his/her field of study.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly. He/she communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected oral work life situations. The student takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment and utilises the publications of their field of study.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures. He/she communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, oral work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers). The student can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment and utilise, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

Assessment scale

0-5

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student
* is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information of a company, product and services
* communicates in expected oral work life situations, but requires help
* interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone)
* recognises the characteristics of the Nordic operational environment
* interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student
* is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly
* communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected oral work life situations
* takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment
* utilizes the publications of their field of study.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student
* is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures
* communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, oral work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers)
* can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment
* can utilize, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 10.09.2023

Timing

30.08.2023 - 18.12.2023

Credits

3 op

Virtual portion

1 op

Mode of delivery

67 % Contact teaching, 33 % Distance learning

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Teaching languages
  • Finnish
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sari Hanska
Person in charge

Sari Hanska

Groups
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

On this course students will learn about the professional business communication in working life environment. European Framework of Reference for Languages B1 level.

After completing the course students will be able to
- tell about their personality, education, work experience, tasks and duties at work by using professional Swedish
- meet customers’ needs when servicing the customer base and communicating with interest groups
- follow and participate in the development of their field by using different ways of communication (media, conferences, literature).

Content (course unit)

What can the student communicate on his/her competence and working life environment in the target language?
What kind of qualifications does the student need to succeed in multicultural customer-based interaction in the target language?
How can the student develop his/her competence and acquire business-related information in the target language?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information about a company, product and services. He/she communicates in expected written work life situations but requires help. The student interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. e-mail), recognises the characteristics of Nordic operational environment and interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly. He/she communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected written work life situations. He/she is able to interpret and create common business documents (e.g. memo) and take into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment. The student utilises the publications of their field of study.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures. He/she communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, written work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers).

Assessment scale

0-5

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student
* is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) briefly and introduce the basic information of a company, product and services
* communicates in expected written work life situations, but requires help
* interprets and produces the most common business life communication situations (e.g. phone)
* recognises the characteristics of the Nordic operational environment
* interprets the main points of publications of their field of study.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student
* is able to tell about themselves (education, work experience, skills) and introduce a company, product and services fairly effortlessly
* communicates fairly fluently and actively in expected written work life situations
* takes into account the characteristics of Nordic operational environment
* utilizes the publications of their field of study.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student
* is able to fluently introduce themselves (education, work experience, skills) as well as company, its products and services and to analyse key figures
* communicates naturally and fluently in various, even challenging, written work life situations (e.g. creating and maintaining customers)
* can work successfully in the Nordic operational environment
* can utilize, apply and analyse publications of their field of study.

Enrolment period

24.09.2023 - 23.10.2023

Timing

24.10.2023 - 31.12.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Taru Nurmala
Person in charge

Syed Mubaraz

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course introduces the main tools and techniques of project management.
During this course a virtual project will be defined, initiated and planned by the students.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Understand the purpose of project management
• Act as member of a project team
• Write a project plan

Content (course unit)

• How to set and initiate a project?
• How to form a team and define the roles and responsibilities?
• How to write a professional level project plan?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can name and explain project management and its key elements. He/she recognizes the phases of a project and is able to name reasons for having a project mode. The student knows the role of a project plan document and its elements. The student can act as a member of a small-scale project team. The student is able to give and receive feedback related to a set project, collaborate in a small team and take responsibility of his/her own studies.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to apply the basic tools used in projects and structure a small project team with dedicated tasks. The student can explain the needs for setting up a small scale project with a project plan. The student can act as a project manager or a team member to accomplish the project. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback and develop skills for co-operation with dedicated roles. The student takes responsibility of his/her studies and is able to balance the workload of the team.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student understands the meaning and relations of the basic concepts of project management. The student analyses multiple alternatives and is able to make sustainable project decisions. He/she is able to connect the project management elements together in a professional manner. The student applies project management tools in a systematic manner and searches and justifies multiple options. The student is able to assess the team and team tasks. He/she finds creative solutions and motivates and develops a project team. The student is able to use feedback to grow professionally in the field and develop creative and constructive working methods. He/she works responsibly towards the project team and commits himself/herself to group work and project management methods beyond the required level.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Contact lessons, group work.

Further information

The course includes the basics of project management, but the biggest part of the course focuses on planning and executing a project together with a project team. The key element in passing the course is active participation in the different phases of that project.

Enrolment period

24.09.2023 - 23.10.2023

Timing

24.10.2023 - 31.12.2023

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Taru Nurmala
Person in charge

Syed Mubaraz

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

This course introduces the main tools and techniques of project management.
During this course a virtual project will be defined, initiated and planned by the students.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
• Understand the purpose of project management
• Act as member of a project team
• Write a project plan

Content (course unit)

• How to set and initiate a project?
• How to form a team and define the roles and responsibilities?
• How to write a professional level project plan?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can name and explain project management and its key elements. He/she recognizes the phases of a project and is able to name reasons for having a project mode. The student knows the role of a project plan document and its elements. The student can act as a member of a small-scale project team. The student is able to give and receive feedback related to a set project, collaborate in a small team and take responsibility of his/her own studies.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to apply the basic tools used in projects and structure a small project team with dedicated tasks. The student can explain the needs for setting up a small scale project with a project plan. The student can act as a project manager or a team member to accomplish the project. The student is able to give and receive constructive feedback and develop skills for co-operation with dedicated roles. The student takes responsibility of his/her studies and is able to balance the workload of the team.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student understands the meaning and relations of the basic concepts of project management. The student analyses multiple alternatives and is able to make sustainable project decisions. He/she is able to connect the project management elements together in a professional manner. The student applies project management tools in a systematic manner and searches and justifies multiple options. The student is able to assess the team and team tasks. He/she finds creative solutions and motivates and develops a project team. The student is able to use feedback to grow professionally in the field and develop creative and constructive working methods. He/she works responsibly towards the project team and commits himself/herself to group work and project management methods beyond the required level.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Contact lessons, group work.

Further information

The course includes the basics of project management, but the biggest part of the course focuses on planning and executing a project together with a project team. The key element in passing the course is active participation in the different phases of that project.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 03.12.2024

Timing

01.01.2024 - 31.12.2024

Credits

5 op

Virtual portion

5 op

RDI portion

5 op

Mode of delivery

Distance learning

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 99

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Pasi Kuusijärvi
Person in charge

Pasi Kuusijärvi

Groups
  • 22IB
  • 21IB

Objectives (course unit)

The course aims to provide students with necessary knowledge related to a project. International Business students carry out a part of their studies as project studies. The projects are defined in advance for the credit count, costs and duration. The projects are commissioned e.g. by local companies or by Tampere University of Applied Sciences. The team projects come from actual companies and the students themselves.

After completing the course, the student will be able to:
• work more professionally in real projects, and participate in carrying out systematically managed projects, from project approval and planning to control and implementation.
• apply and further develop existing disciplinary knowledge in real life cases and projects.
• use individual communication, negotiation and group work skills more effectively and efficiently.
• enhance use of different sources of information, learning environments, project management software tools, and IT in general.

Content (course unit)

The contents include the followings:
• How can universities and local companies work together?
• What different projects are relevant for university of applied sciences (UAS) students?
• What kind of co-operation will benefit both the student(s) and the client?
• What can a UAS student learn and benefit from participation in a real project?
• How is project management interrelated to the strategic and general management of an organization?
• What are the benefits of applying systematic project management methods and related IT tools for different projects?
• How are projects planned, implemented, controlled and reported successfully?
• What kind of proposed generalizations can be made based on successful project outcomes?

Prerequisites (course unit)

None.

Further information (course unit)

See further instructions and required forms at www.wiki.tamk.fi (use "Business Related Project Studies" as a search key there).

Assessment criteria, pass/fail (course unit)

The Project Studies is an administrative solution to get the students’ various individual business-related project studies and credits registered, as a part of their bachelor’s degree studies. The student can take initiative of the project he/she wants to include to the project studies.
The student is able to plan and implement his/her own project. He/she can reach the pre-set objectives and report the results in writing. He/she is able and willing to receive feedback from the commissioner and supervisor, and analyze the project outcome in conjunction with them.

Location and time

Project by project, case-specifically.

Exam schedules

No written exam.

Assessment methods and criteria

All the required project documentation is prepared according to this Implementation information and the more detailed project-specific instructions from the responsible TAMK instructor of this course.

As soon as the project final report is approved by the course instructor he/she records the student's ECTS credits together with the Pass/Fail mark onto Pakki.

Assessment scale

Pass/Fail

Teaching methods

To learn to act individually, a completely student-driven implementation in which the role of the TAMK instructor is limited only to inform the student about the required project management documentation, approve the student's documents delivered to him/her as well as take care of the grading on the scale pass/fail.

In addition to the grade (S), the student will get the title of his/her performed 1-5 cr project visible on his/her TAMK BBA degree certificate material, when graduating.

The required project documentation:
1. Project Contract (also called Project Draft)
2. Project Plan
3. Project Final Report (including either an integrated or a separate report on the student's actual daily project working hours).

Learning materials

Not assigned by TAMK (utilization of earlier project management course material is recommendable).

The student(s) collect their case-specific project learning material independently.

Student workload

There is a strict requirement that the student(s) also report to TAMK his/their actual project working hours in the project final reporting phase, on a daily basis.

Even if the pre-defined size of the project is 5 ECTS credits, the actual final number of ECTS credits to be registered for the student based on the daily report will be 1 - 5 ECTS credits.

Content scheduling

Project-specifically.

Completion alternatives

No.

Practical training and working life cooperation

Each project has it's own client, external to - or, at least, separate from the degree studies of - the TAMK Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business.

International connections

Possible, project by project.

Further information

Pasi Kuusijärvi, M.Sc. (Econ. & Bus. Adm.), AmO, HHJ PJ
Senior Lecturer, Accounting and Financial Management

Tampere University of Applied Sciences (TAMK)
Tampere, Finland

pasi.kuusijarvi@tuni.fi
Tel. +358 40 846 3052
www.tuni.fi

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 01.09.2023

Timing

01.08.2023 - 17.12.2023

Credits

6 op

Virtual portion

2 op

RDI portion

6 op

Mode of delivery

67 % Contact teaching, 33 % Distance learning

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

15 - 40

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Pietro Albanese
  • Kirsi Tanner
Person in charge

Pietro Albanese

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The aims of this course are threefold. It provides the students understanding in customer intelligence: how to collect and analyze customer information in a reliable and useful way. It also gives the students basic knowledge of the necessary research approaches for their research project. In addition the course includes a project management module to develop skills in managing a multicultural business project.

After completing the course the student will be able to plan and execute a customer oriented research and development project in a scientifically reliable way.

Content (course unit)

Key questions:
- What are the principles of valid and reliable research for business (or academic world)
- Which tools and methods can be used in increasing the understanding of
customer needs to co-create customer value?
- How to refine research data to customer intelligence?
- How to communicate the results in an interesting way?
- How to manage a research and development project successfully?

Prerequisites (course unit)

None

Further information (course unit)

The course consists of lectures, exercises and the planning and execution of a customer related r&d project for a company or organization.

Research and Development Project:
Student teams find themselves a customer organization with an information and development need, execute data collection and analysis and give development suggestions based on their analysis. The outcomes will be presented in a public seminar, which is planned and managed by the students themselves. Teachers will provide coaching for the project teams.

There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student has rudimentary knowledge of quantitative and qualitative research methods, including data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. He/she is capable of collecting and analysing basic customer data. The student has elementary skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has advanced knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select suitable data collection methods for a variety of situations and provide reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student is skilled in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has excellent knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews, observations, document analysis and others. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select accurate data collection methods for a variety of situations and justify reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student has profound skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence. The student thoroughly understands how data, analytics, and insights work together.

Location and time

Check the official time tables in moodle

Exam schedules

We will inform the students at the beginning of the course. The exam schedule is in moodle

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Lessons and practical group project work, group sparring sessions, Individual exam

Learning materials

The material is shared week by week before the start of the lesson

Completion alternatives

Because of the particular structure of the course the methodology is mandatory.

Practical training and working life cooperation

Group research work

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 25.08.2023

Timing

01.08.2023 - 17.12.2023

Credits

6 op

Virtual portion

2 op

RDI portion

6 op

Mode of delivery

67 % Contact teaching, 33 % Distance learning

Unit

Business and Media

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

15 - 40

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Pietro Albanese
  • Kirsi Tanner
Person in charge

Kirsi Tanner

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The aims of this course are threefold. It provides the students understanding in customer intelligence: how to collect and analyze customer information in a reliable and useful way. It also gives the students basic knowledge of the necessary research approaches for their research project. In addition the course includes a project management module to develop skills in managing a multicultural business project.

After completing the course the student will be able to plan and execute a customer oriented research and development project in a scientifically reliable way.

Content (course unit)

Key questions:
- What are the principles of valid and reliable research for business (or academic world)
- Which tools and methods can be used in increasing the understanding of
customer needs to co-create customer value?
- How to refine research data to customer intelligence?
- How to communicate the results in an interesting way?
- How to manage a research and development project successfully?

Prerequisites (course unit)

None

Further information (course unit)

The course consists of lectures, exercises and the planning and execution of a customer related r&d project for a company or organization.

Research and Development Project:
Student teams find themselves a customer organization with an information and development need, execute data collection and analysis and give development suggestions based on their analysis. The outcomes will be presented in a public seminar, which is planned and managed by the students themselves. Teachers will provide coaching for the project teams.

There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student has rudimentary knowledge of quantitative and qualitative research methods, including data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. He/she is capable of collecting and analysing basic customer data. The student has elementary skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has advanced knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select suitable data collection methods for a variety of situations and provide reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student is skilled in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has excellent knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews, observations, document analysis and others. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select accurate data collection methods for a variety of situations and justify reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student has profound skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence. The student thoroughly understands how data, analytics, and insights work together.

Assessment scale

0-5

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 08.01.2024

Timing

22.01.2024 - 19.05.2024

Credits

6 op

Virtual portion

1 op

RDI portion

5 op

Mode of delivery

84 % Contact teaching, 16 % Distance learning

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 40

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Pietro Albanese
  • Sari Matala
Person in charge

Sari Matala

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The aims of this course are threefold. It provides the students understanding in customer intelligence: how to collect and analyze customer information in a reliable and useful way. It also gives the students basic knowledge of the necessary research approaches for their research project. In addition the course includes a project management module to develop skills in managing a multicultural business project.

After completing the course the student will be able to plan and execute a customer oriented research and development project in a scientifically reliable way.

Content (course unit)

Key questions:
- What are the principles of valid and reliable research for business (or academic world)
- Which tools and methods can be used in increasing the understanding of
customer needs to co-create customer value?
- How to refine research data to customer intelligence?
- How to communicate the results in an interesting way?
- How to manage a research and development project successfully?

Prerequisites (course unit)

None

Further information (course unit)

The course consists of lectures, exercises and the planning and execution of a customer related r&d project for a company or organization.

Research and Development Project:
Student teams find themselves a customer organization with an information and development need, execute data collection and analysis and give development suggestions based on their analysis. The outcomes will be presented in a public seminar, which is planned and managed by the students themselves. Teachers will provide coaching for the project teams.

There will be two implementations of the course, one in the autumn semester and another in the spring.

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student has rudimentary knowledge of quantitative and qualitative research methods, including data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. He/she is capable of collecting and analysing basic customer data. The student has elementary skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has advanced knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select suitable data collection methods for a variety of situations and provide reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student is skilled in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has excellent knowledge of quantitative, qualitative and mixed research methods, including diverse data collection methods such as surveys, interviews, observations, document analysis and others. The student knows the difference between primary and secondary data. He/she is able to select accurate data collection methods for a variety of situations and justify reasons for the selection. The student knows how to collect and analyse customer data. He/she is able to utilise the gained insights to improve business processes. The student has profound skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of customer intelligence. The student thoroughly understands how data, analytics, and insights work together.

Location and time

Study period 3-4, 2024

Exam schedules

No exam

Assessment methods and criteria

Introduction to research, qualitative methods and project management, 50%
Quantitative research 50%

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Contact and online teaching
exercises
practical work / research project (COMPULSORY)

Learning materials

Lecture slides and other material presented in Moodle.

Student workload

The total of the course is 6 credits meaning about 162 hours of student work altogether. It should be noticed that a great part of the course work is done outside the class hours both independently and in team meetings, and the students are required to commit to the teamwork.
The detailed course plan will be introduced on the first class.
As deliverables students will produce the following:
- team agreement
- contract with the customer
- project- and research plan
- course topic tasks
- final research report, team self reflection and peer review included

Content scheduling

Study period 3-4, 2024,see schedule in Moodle
Introduction to academic research and project management (S Matala)
Quantitative methods in academic business research (P Albanese)
Qualitative methods in academic business research (S Matala)
R&D Project, coaching (S Matala, P Albanese)
Final report

Completion alternatives

None

Practical training and working life cooperation

Student teams will find themselves a business company or other organization to be their customer in the practical research project and work in close cooperation with it throughout the whole course.

International connections

International student teams and project commissioners

Further information

NOTE: course grade is collective, based on team work outcomes. Each team member receives the same grade.

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has not participated team working and team project according to course implementation plan. Student shows no understanding the premises and principles of academic business research, quantitative and qualitative research methods and project management.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has achieved the objectives of the course sufficiently. Student understands the premises and principles of academic research, quantitative and qualitative research methods and project management partly.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has achieved the objectives of the course well although the skills and competences are somewhat in need of further development. Student understands the premises and principles of academic research, quantitative and qualitative research methods and project management mainly and is able to conduct justified analysis.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Student has achieved the objectives of the course excellently. The student masters the principles of academic research, quantitative and qualitative research methods and project management in excellent manner and is able to conduct fluent and justified analysis.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 08.01.2024

Timing

09.01.2024 - 20.02.2024

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Juha Tuominen
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 23IB1
    International Business, syksy 2023, 1-ryhmä
  • 23IB2
    International Business, syksy 2023, 2-ryhmä
  • 23IB3
    International Business, syksy 2023, 3-ryhmä
  • 23IB4
    International Business, syksy 2023, 4-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

During the course students will get to know different sales processes and negotiation situations. Students will plan and practice different sales approaches and improve their personal sales skills. During the course the students will plan and organize a sales event.

After completing the course the students will be able to
• Describe an effective sales process
• Prepare for different sales and negotiation situations
• Listen to the customer and identify the customer needs during a sales meeting
• Communicate key messages to the customer
• Plan and organize a sales event

Content (course unit)

• What is a sales process and how to apply it in practice?
• Which factors affect successful sales negotiation?
• What are the differences between b-to-c and b-to-b sales?
• How to listen to the customer and ask good questions?
• How to show empathy and address difficult situations in a customer oriented way?
• How to plan and organize a sales event?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can describe the sales and negotiations process and identify sales opportunities. The student can ask a customer appropriate questions relevant to closing a sale and list the eight types of sales people identified by the Harvard Business School research. The student is able to name the ABC and SEA sales acronyms and participate in a sales event. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present factual information about their product or service. The student can follow a script or checklist to produce communication to explain the benefits of their service. The student is able to communicate in a sales environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student can explain the sales process and explain the role of participants in the sales process. The student is able to comment on and evaluate a sales meeting and describe the 8 sales personalities. The student can explain and apply sales processes to their own business simulation and develop sales and negotiation strategies. The student can describe and plan a sales meeting, analyse the ABC sales process and explain why SEA sales process is more relevant to contemporary sales. The student can explain the importance of listening to customer needs. The student is able to explain sales phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English. The student is able to take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures and can adjust their sales communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates some ability to evaluate and adapt their sales approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new sales methods, technologies and ideas.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can analyse and evaluate a sales situation. The student can analyse the communications structures within an organization and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organisation. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization. The student can reflect on their own strengths and weaknesses as a sales person and negotiator and adapt their negotiations strategy as needs arise. The student can identify their sales type (Harvard BR – 8 types of sales people) and take appropriate steps to develop areas as required. The student analyses sales challenges and synthesises possible solutions and recognises possible implications. The student collaborates with peers during the learning process and evaluates different sales approaches. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their sales approach as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values and is able to adapt their sales and negotiations techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

Location and time

09/01: 14:00-17:00 in B3-27
16/01: 14:00-17:00 in B3-27
23/01: 14:00-17:00 in B3-27
30/01: 14:00-17:00 in B3-27
06/02: 14:00-17:00 in B3-27
13/02: 14:00-17:00 in B3-27
20/02: 14:00-17:00 in B3-27

Exam schedules

N/A

Assessment methods and criteria

Participation in the course, assignments, and Sales Up performance will be evaluated

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped class sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Roleplay exercises
- Practical exercises (off-campus)

Learning materials

- Presentation material
- Articles and case studies
- Videos
- Guest speaker presentation

Student workload

Students are expected to:
- Attend sessions
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Prepare and participate in the Sales Up event

Content scheduling

Themes will be discussed in the first lesson.

- What is a sales process and how to apply it in practice?
- Which factors affect successful sales negotiation?
- What are the differences between b-to-c and b-to-b sales?
- Understanding inbound customer relationships and promoting the value proposition as part of sales - sales promotion "technology industry".
- How to listen to the customer and ask good questions?
- How to show empathy and address difficult situations in a customer-oriented way?
- How to plan and organize a sales event?

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

- Practice in setting up and working in a trade fair
- Negotiations with other virtual firms

International connections

N/A

Further information

N/A

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can describe the sales and negotiations process and identify sales opportunities. The student can ask a customer appropriate questions relevant to closing a sale and list the eight types of sales people identified by the Harvard Business School research. The student is able to name the ABC and SEA sales acronyms and participate in a sales event. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present factual information about their product or service. The student can follow a script or checklist to produce communication to explain the benefits of their service. The student is able to communicate in a sales environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can explain the sales process and explain the role of participants in the sales process. The student is able to comment on and evaluate a sales meeting and describe the 8 sales personalities. The student can explain and apply sales processes to their own business simulation and develop sales and negotiation strategies. The student can describe and plan a sales meeting, analyse the ABC sales process and explain why SEA sales process is more relevant to contemporary sales. The student can explain the importance of listening to customer needs. The student is able to explain sales phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English. The student is able to take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures and can adjust their sales communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates some ability to evaluate and adapt their sales approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new sales methods, technologies and ideas.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can analyse and evaluate a sales situation. The student can analyse the communications structures within an organization and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organisation. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization. The student can reflect on their own strengths and weaknesses as a sales person and negotiator and adapt their negotiations strategy as needs arise. The student can identify their sales type (Harvard BR – 8 types of sales people) and take appropriate steps to develop areas as required. The student analyses sales challenges and synthesises possible solutions and recognises possible implications. The student collaborates with peers during the learning process and evaluates different sales approaches. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their sales approach as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values and is able to adapt their sales and negotiations techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 08.01.2024

Timing

09.01.2024 - 20.02.2024

Credits

4 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
  • Juha Tuominen
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 23IB5
    International Business, syksy 2023, 5-ryhmä
  • 23IB6
    International Business, syksy 2023, 6-ryhmä
  • 23IB7
    International Business, syksy 2023, 7-ryhmä
  • 23IB8
    International Business, syksy 2023, 8-ryhmä

Objectives (course unit)

During the course students will get to know different sales processes and negotiation situations. Students will plan and practice different sales approaches and improve their personal sales skills. During the course the students will plan and organize a sales event.

After completing the course the students will be able to
• Describe an effective sales process
• Prepare for different sales and negotiation situations
• Listen to the customer and identify the customer needs during a sales meeting
• Communicate key messages to the customer
• Plan and organize a sales event

Content (course unit)

• What is a sales process and how to apply it in practice?
• Which factors affect successful sales negotiation?
• What are the differences between b-to-c and b-to-b sales?
• How to listen to the customer and ask good questions?
• How to show empathy and address difficult situations in a customer oriented way?
• How to plan and organize a sales event?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student can describe the sales and negotiations process and identify sales opportunities. The student can ask a customer appropriate questions relevant to closing a sale and list the eight types of sales people identified by the Harvard Business School research. The student is able to name the ABC and SEA sales acronyms and participate in a sales event. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present factual information about their product or service. The student can follow a script or checklist to produce communication to explain the benefits of their service. The student is able to communicate in a sales environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student can explain the sales process and explain the role of participants in the sales process. The student is able to comment on and evaluate a sales meeting and describe the 8 sales personalities. The student can explain and apply sales processes to their own business simulation and develop sales and negotiation strategies. The student can describe and plan a sales meeting, analyse the ABC sales process and explain why SEA sales process is more relevant to contemporary sales. The student can explain the importance of listening to customer needs. The student is able to explain sales phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English. The student is able to take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures and can adjust their sales communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates some ability to evaluate and adapt their sales approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new sales methods, technologies and ideas.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student can analyse and evaluate a sales situation. The student can analyse the communications structures within an organization and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organisation. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization. The student can reflect on their own strengths and weaknesses as a sales person and negotiator and adapt their negotiations strategy as needs arise. The student can identify their sales type (Harvard BR – 8 types of sales people) and take appropriate steps to develop areas as required. The student analyses sales challenges and synthesises possible solutions and recognises possible implications. The student collaborates with peers during the learning process and evaluates different sales approaches. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their sales approach as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values and is able to adapt their sales and negotiations techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

Location and time

09/01: 11:00-14:00 in B3-27
16/01: 11:00-14:00 in B3-27
23/01: 11:00-14:00 in B3-27
30/01: 11:00-14:00 in B3-27
06/02: 11:00-14:00 in B3-27
13/02: 11:00-14:00 in B3-27
20/02: 11:00-14:00 in B3-27

Exam schedules

N/A

Assessment methods and criteria

Participation in the course, assignments, and Sales Up performance will be evaluated

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped class sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Roleplay exercises
- Practical exercises (off-campus)

Learning materials

- Presentation material
- Articles and case studies
- Videos
- Guest speaker presentation

Student workload

Students are expected to:
- Attend sessions
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Prepare and participate in the Sales Up event

Content scheduling

Themes will be discussed in the first lesson.

- What is a sales process and how to apply it in practice?
- Which factors affect successful sales negotiation?
- What are the differences between b-to-c and b-to-b sales?
- Understanding inbound customer relationships and promoting the value proposition as part of sales - sales promotion "technology industry".
- How to listen to the customer and ask good questions?
- How to show empathy and address difficult situations in a customer-oriented way?
- How to plan and organize a sales event?

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

- Practice in setting up and working in a trade fair
- Negotiations with other virtual firms

International connections

N/A

Further information

N/A

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can describe the sales and negotiations process and identify sales opportunities. The student can ask a customer appropriate questions relevant to closing a sale and list the eight types of sales people identified by the Harvard Business School research. The student is able to name the ABC and SEA sales acronyms and participate in a sales event. The student can communicate simple messages in spoken English and present factual information about their product or service. The student can follow a script or checklist to produce communication to explain the benefits of their service. The student is able to communicate in a sales environment by participating in both speaking/listening, reading/writing activities.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can explain the sales process and explain the role of participants in the sales process. The student is able to comment on and evaluate a sales meeting and describe the 8 sales personalities. The student can explain and apply sales processes to their own business simulation and develop sales and negotiation strategies. The student can describe and plan a sales meeting, analyse the ABC sales process and explain why SEA sales process is more relevant to contemporary sales. The student can explain the importance of listening to customer needs. The student is able to explain sales phenomena clearly by speaking and writing in English. The student is able to take account of cultural norms when devising or responding to communications from other cultures and can adjust their sales communication so that it is appropriate for the audience and medium being used. The student demonstrates some ability to evaluate and adapt their sales approach based on the context and reaction of recipients and is open to new sales methods, technologies and ideas.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can analyse and evaluate a sales situation. The student can analyse the communications structures within an organization and explain, evaluate and critique the public relations process of a given organisation. The student can design and implement solutions to communications problems within an organization. The student can reflect on their own strengths and weaknesses as a sales person and negotiator and adapt their negotiations strategy as needs arise. The student can identify their sales type (Harvard BR – 8 types of sales people) and take appropriate steps to develop areas as required. The student analyses sales challenges and synthesises possible solutions and recognises possible implications. The student collaborates with peers during the learning process and evaluates different sales approaches. The student can demonstrate the ability to adapt their sales approach as appropriate to context, situation, and level of formality. The student is tolerant of those who have different cultural communication norms and values and is able to adapt their sales and negotiations techniques and strategies as appropriate to the given situation, including tone, pace, intonation, body language, facial expression, dress and appearance, level of formality. The student is able to demonstrate the ability to listen actively.

Enrolment period

08.06.2023 - 31.08.2023

Timing

31.08.2023 - 23.10.2023

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

In this course students will learn service design thinking in a digital business environment. The student will study how service design thinking is applied to customer centric business development and how the customer centric value chains are formed. Students will use service design tools and methods to design a business development plan for an e-commerce company.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:
- develop innovative business development plan by using different kind of tools, like Storytelling, Design Scenarios, Service Blueprints, Empathy Map etc.
- search different kind of relevant customer information using design thinking tools
- describe the value chain in e-commerce

Content (course unit)

• Service Design as an inter-disciplinary approach
• Fields of Service Design
• Service Design Thinking tools

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student has rudimentary knowledge of service design thinking, including data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. He/she is capable of using basic design thinking tools such as Empathy Map. The student has elementary skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of service design thinking.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has advanced knowledge of Service Design Thinking methods, including such as Value Proposition Canvas and Lean Canvas. The student knows the difference between customer centric and customer based. He/she is able to select suitable Service Design methods for a variety of situations and provide reasons for the selection. The student knows how to build a value chain. He/she is able to utilize the gained insights to improve business processes. The student is skilled in planning and implementing a service design project in the context of e-commerce.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has excellent knowledge of service design methods, including interviews, observations, document analysis and others. He/she is able to select accurate service design methods for a variety of situations and justify reasons for the selection. The student knows how to build a value chain. He/she is able to utilize the gained insights to improve business processes. The student has profound skills in planning and implementing a service design project in the context of e-commerce. The student thoroughly understands how service design, value chain and customer-centricity work together.

Location and time

Sessions will be held according to the schedule in Pakki.

Exam schedules

N/A

Assessment methods and criteria

According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being

The evaluation is based on the team's service design project outcome and individual learning diary.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research

Learning materials

- Presentation material
- Articles
- Case studies
- Videos
- Assigned E-books

Student workload

According to TAMK schedule, ECT credits and Moodle timing instructions. Students are expected to:
- Attend sessions
- Participate in group discussions and workshops
- Complete the course project
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Details given in the first lesson

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Knowledge gained from the course can be applied to various projects in which service design/ design thinking is applicable.

International connections

Multiple global case studies will be used in the course

Further information

N/A

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student has rudimentary knowledge of service design thinking, including data collection methods such as surveys, interviews and observations. The student is capable of using basic design thinking tools such as empathy maps. The student has elementary skills in planning and implementing a research project in the context of service design thinking.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student has advanced knowledge of service design thinking methods, such as value proposition canvas and lean canvas. The student knows the differences between customer-centric and customer-based. The student is able to select suitable service design methods for a variety of situations and provide reasons for the selection. The student knows how to build a value chain. The student is able to utilize gained insights to improve business processes. The student is skilled in planning and implementing a service design project in the context of e-commerce.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student has excellent knowledge of service design methods, including interviews, observations, document analysis and others. The student is able to select accurate service design methods for a variety of situations and justify reasons for the selection. The student knows how to build a value chain. He/she is able to utilize the gained insights to improve business processes. The student has profound skills in planning and implementing a service design project in the context of e-commerce. The student thoroughly understands how service design, value chain and customer-centricity work together.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 12.01.2024

Timing

01.01.2024 - 06.03.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Salman Saleem
Person in charge

Salman Saleem

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

This course expands on the earlier Introduction to Marketing 1 and 2, providing deeper knowledge and skills in strategic planning and development of marketing. The course gives the fundamental basis for those aiming at a career in marketing, merging theory with practice.

After completing the course the students will be able to
• Derive the marketing strategy from the business strategy
• Choose and apply different marketing strategies for different
businesses
• Write a consistent marketing plan based on customer needs and
marketing strategy

Content (course unit)

What are the different levels of marketing planning?
What kind of different marketing strategies businesses apply and why?
What is the structure and content of a strategic marketing plan?
How does marketing function contribute the success of a business?

Prerequisites (course unit)

Introduction to Marketing 1 and 2 or equivalent

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to identify principles of the business strategy and strategic marketing. The student is able to participate in a team project performing the given tasks in according to instructions.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to determine and apply the concept and tools of strategic marketing in marketing planning. He/she is able to conduct some analysis and suggest development actions suitable for the business strategy. The student actively contributes to a team project being able to receive and give constructive feedback.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student masters the concepts and different models of strategic marketing, and is able to connect business strategy to marketing strategy in the business context in question. Student is able to conduct well structured analysis and is able to create, evaluate and combine different solutions to a given marketing problem. The student acts in a flexible and constructive way in team projects developing the team’s interaction.

Location and time

Sessions will be held according to the schedule in Pakki.

Exam schedules

All the assignments given must be submitted on the given schedule. The schedule will be given in the first class.
Final project presentation on the last class meeting

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research

Learning materials

Hooley, G. J., Piercy, N. Nicoulaud, B. & Nick, Le (2020). Marketing strategy and competitive positioning. 7th edition, Pearson Education.
Kotler, P., Keller, K. L., Brady, M., Goodman, M., & Hansen, T. (2019). Marketing management (4th European edition.). Pearson.

Additional course material, such as blogs, videos, blogs, and short articles, will be provided in Moodle Workspace.

Student workload

According to the TAMK schedule, ECT credits, and Moodle timing instructions: A course of 3 credits will mean a workload of approximately 80 hours. which will be divided as follows: classes, casework, and reporting: learning diary: Classroom group assignments and tasks.
Students are expected to:
- Attend lessons
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Study materials are given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Market-led strategic management
Customer Analysis
Competitor analysis
Strategic planning for Products
Strategies for pricing
Strategies for placement
Strategic for promotion

Completion alternatives

If the course cannot be completed the instructed way, the student should contact the teacher to negotiate other possible ways of completing the course.

Practical training and working life cooperation

Project work/case studies
During the course, the students will work in small groups. The casework may require working with the company representative.

International connections

The course is a part of International Business Studies, so the international aspects are an important part of studying in general. An international point of view is taken into consideration whenever strategic marketing is discussed.

Further information

According to TAMK evaluation criteria (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student isn't able to identify any principles of business strategy and strategic marketing. The student hasn't been able to participate in a team project or has failed to submit the required course tasks and assignments.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to identify principles of business strategy and strategic marketing. The student is able to participate in a team project performing the given tasks according to instructions.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student can determine and apply the concepts and tools of strategic marketing in marketing planning. The student can conduct some analysis and suggest development actions suitable for the business strategy. The student actively contributes to a team project by being able to receive and give constructive feedback.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student masters the concepts and different models of strategic marketing and can connect business strategy to marketing strategy in the business context in question. The student can conduct well-structured analysis and can create, evaluate, and combine different solutions to a given marketing problem. The student acts flexibly and constructively in team projects developing the team’s interaction.

Enrolment period

17.09.2023 - 16.11.2023

Timing

17.10.2023 - 17.01.2024

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Salman Saleem
Person in charge

Salman Saleem

Groups
  • 22LIKO
  • 22IB
  • 21IB

Objectives (course unit)

Students will gain knowledge about how to successfully sell online. The student will learn about different digital selling models. Additionally, they learn how to do online market research to find a profitable product or niche. They learn on utilizing social commerce for direct sales. Alongside an understanding of paid social and web advertising and enabling them to learn how to make sales. Finally, students learn about fulfilment techniques.

Content (course unit)

Upon successful completion of the course, students can:
1. Understand various digital selling business models.
2. Able to choose and validate products through market research at digital place.
3. Learn how to sell online? from setting up an online store to selecting a reliable e-commerce platform.
4. Able to utilize social commerce for direct sales.
5. Able to sell using paid social and web advertising.
6. Understand and implement various fulfilment techniques.

Prerequisites (course unit)

None

Further information (course unit)

On-line course

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student has introductory knowledge of digital marketing practices but lacks an active role in creating and publishing content for the purpose. In a team his/her role is merely passive and he/she requires help from others to cope with his/her own tasks.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student has basic knowledge of digital marketing and is able to independently take responsibility of his/her own learning as well as support other team members. He/she is an active contributor to the team, is able to understand and use social media channels for digital marketing and can provide good digital content to engage customers.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student has advanced knowledge of digital marketing tools, is independent, takes full responsibility of his/her own learning and helps other team members to succeed. He/she understands well the dynamics of social media channels in marketing and is able to create attractive digital content to engage existing customers and attract new ones.

Location and time

Sessions will be held online according to the schedule in Pakki.

Exam schedules

The final exam will be given at the last class meeting.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped classroom sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Independent study and research

Learning materials

Required Textbook

Chaffey, D, & Smith, PR 2017, Digital Marketing Excellence: Planning, Optimizing and Integrating Online Marketing, Taylor & Francis Group, Florence.
Additional readings
Stinnett, B. (2022). The Digital Selling Handbook (1st ed.). McGraw-Hill Education.

Additional course material, such as blogs, videos, blogs, and short articles, will be provided in Digicampus Workspace.
https://digicampus.fi/?lang=en

Student workload

According to the TAMK schedule, ECT credits, and Moodle timing instructions.
Students are expected to:
- Attend lessons
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Details are given in the first lesson

Completion alternatives

NA

Practical training and working life cooperation

Project work/case studies

International connections

Cases and discussion, global operational business environment, and international collaborative projects

Further information

NA

Enrolment period

02.11.2023 - 12.11.2023

Timing

01.11.2023 - 31.12.2023

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 20

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Salman Saleem
Person in charge

Salman Saleem

Groups
  • 22LIKO
  • 23KVHN2
    Exchange Students International Business Autumn 2023
  • 22IB
  • 21IB

Objectives (course unit)

The aim of the study subject is to provide students with theoretical knowledge and skills to recognize and manage the company's logistics processes, identify problem areas and be able to provide suggestions for their solution without violating the basic principles of sustainable development.

Content (course unit)

After completion, students will be able to analyze the company's logistics chain, identify the structural elements of the logistics chain and identify opportunities for improvement. Systematic management of logistics processes will provide a general understanding of how to apply logistics knowledge, modern technologies and IT systems to improve the company's logistics processes in order to optimize the organization of the company's activities. The study subject applies the methods of case analysis of logistics processes, document filling and practical application of logistics IT, lectures of integrated business specialists and study visits to logistics and trade companies.

Prerequisites (course unit)

None.

Further information (course unit)

Online

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

1 (weak).
Knowledge and skills (skills) meet the minimum requirements
Knowledge meets the minimum requirements for supply chain management. Applies knowledge to solve simple practical tasks and situations. Simple naming of mastered concepts, retelling of the text. The answer focuses on one aspect.
Minimum sufficient capacity to deal with supply chain management practical situations, based on examples. Able to act by analogy. Minimum skills of expression and presentation.
2 (satisfactory).
Knowledge and abilities (skills) below average, there are mistakes
Below-average knowledge, there are mistakes. He applies knowledge to simple supply chain management practical tasks and situations. Got acquainted with the main material of the subject of study. Satisfactorily perceives concepts, is able to describe in his own words the information that is accepted. The analysis focuses on several aspects, but fails to link them.
Knowledge is applied in accordance with the presented examples of Supply Chain Management. Satisfactory quality of performance. Knows how to act by analogy. Correctly performs easy tasks in the subject of study, but does not perceive the more complex ones. Satisfactory skills of expression and presentation.
THRESHOLD
The student knows the most important theories and principles of his subject of study; the ability to apply knowledge to solve simple problems in supply chain management; may participate in the collection, evaluation and interpretation of data on the subject of his studies necessary for making decisions; able to convey the main information, ideas, problems of the subject of study; have self-learning abilities.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

3 (average).
Average knowledge and abilities, there are minor errors
Average knowledge of supply chain management, there are minor errors. Applies knowledge to solve practical tasks and situations. Got acquainted with the main material of the module. Understands and uses concepts. Several essential parts are combined into a whole. Argues well enough.
Knowledge is applied in accordance with the presented examples of supply chain management. Good performance quality. Correctly performs moderate tasks. Sufficient skills of expression and presentation.
4 (good).
Better than average knowledge and skills
Better-than-average knowledge and its application in solving practical tasks and situations in supply chain management. Got acquainted with the mandatory material of the subject of study. Able to independently work with additional material. Understands concepts and principles, applies them correctly. Well argues and substantiates arguments with facts.
Well applies knowledge. Correctly performs supply chain management tasks of medium complexity and more difficult. Good performance quality. Good expression and presentation skills. Knows what methods, techniques to apply.
TYPICAL
The student knows the most important theories and principles of the subject of study, is able to substantiate his essential proposals; the ability to apply knowledge to solve standard supply chain management problems; can independently collect, evaluate and interpret the data necessary for making decisions; is able to convey the usual information, ideas, problems and solutions of the study module; have the learning abilities necessary for further study and self-study.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

5 (excellent).
Excellent, exceptional knowledge and skills
Excellent, exceptional, comprehensive knowledge and its application in solving complex practical tasks and situations of supply chain management. Independently studied the additional literature of the subject of study. Perfectly understands and correctly uses concepts, is able to analyze them in the wider context of the subject of study. Thinks in an original, independent and creative way. Excellent analytical and assessment skills.
Perfectly applies theoretical knowledge. Perfectly performs complex non-standard tasks of supply chain management. Impeccable, exceptional performance quality. Excellent resolution and presentation skills. Well understands what and why they are doing.
EXCELLENT
The student knows the latest sources, theory and principles of the subject of study, is able to create and develop new ideas; the ability to apply knowledge and solve complex and atypical supply chain management tasks; can independently collect, evaluate, interpret data and make decisions based on it; able to logically convey ideas, problems and solutions; have the learning abilities necessary for further study and self-study.

Assessment scale

0-5

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 10.09.2023

Timing

04.09.2023 - 22.10.2023

Credits

5 op

Virtual portion

1 op

Mode of delivery

80 % Contact teaching, 20 % Distance learning

Unit

International Business

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 40

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sari Matala
Person in charge

Sari Matala

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

The course is focusing on nature, wellbeing and event tourism from the sustainability point of view.



Learning outcomes:

Course is introducing the aspects of sustainability in tourism business.

Important and profitable types of tourism are studied
Students are familiarized with cases concerning each type of tourism.



After completing the course, students are able to:

Consider principles of sustainability in tourism business

Identify motivational factors typical for human nature contact and to apply these factors in developing nature tourism
Understand wellbeing in tourism business and to be able to include aspects of it into developing tourism
Design, organize and manage different kinds of events

Content (course unit)

Which are the principles of sustainability in tourism?
Which are the motivational factors typical for human nature contact and how to consider these in tourism?
Why is wellbeing an important aspect in every type of tourism and how to consider it in designing products?
What is event management and how to design, organize and manage different kinds of events successfully?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to identify and list principles of sustainability in tourism business as well as motivational factors for human-nature contact. The student recognises and is able to define the significance of well-being in tourism business and explain how it is included in tourism products. The student is able to participate actively in designing and organising an event.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to consider and evaluate principles of sustainability in event tourism products as well as motivational factors for human-nature contact. The student is able to explain the relationship between well-being aspects and success in tourism business. The student is able to design and organise an event as an active member of a team.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to profoundly understand the relationship of a human being and the sustainable use of nature in event tourism. He/she can include these elements to event tourism product development alongside with the well-being aspects. The student is able to design innovative events, organise and manage them in a leading role.

Location and time

Course takes place in period 1. See Moodle for detailled schedule (available in Autumn 2023)

Exam schedules

Exam in Moodle (available in Autumn 2023)

Assessment methods and criteria

Participating a team task. Individual exam is assessed for individual grade.

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Meetings, lectures, discussions, team task, individual working and individual exam

Learning materials

Literature and course material is presented in Moodle course (available in Autumn 2023)

Student workload

5cr = 135h
Meetings and exam 9h
Individual studying and reflecting feedback 80h
Team working 46h

Content scheduling

See Moodle for detailled schedule (available in Autumn 2023)

Completion alternatives

Must be discussed with teacher beforehand

Practical training and working life cooperation

-

International connections

International student teams

Further information

This course is mainly individual and team working. You have a good opportunity and freedom to organize your working. Meetings and team working are highly important to attend in order to pass the course! Without participating team working, course is failled. NOTE: Individual exam is assessed for the total grade, though.

Assessment criteria - fail (0) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

No participating in team task working, task instructions are not followed, lack in applying academic literature/course material.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Participating team task working. Task description is partly followed, student is able to produce text, but there are only few academic references/course material applied and/or theories are not completely understood. Ideas are superficially constructed.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Participating team task working. Task description is followed, student is able to produce fluent text reflecting justified academic references/course material applied and/or theories are mostly understood. Text contains original or innovative ideas.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

Participating team task working. Task description is followed carefully, student is able to produce fluent text reflecting justified and variety of academic references/course material and/or theories are fully understood with professional touch. Highly original or innovative ideas presented.

Enrolment period

02.07.2023 - 24.09.2023

Timing

01.08.2023 - 31.12.2023

Credits

5 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Niina Syrjälä
Person in charge

Niina Syrjälä

Groups
  • 23KVHN2S
    Exchange Students International Business autumn 2023
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

Tourism marketing course focuses on customer-oriented marketing of tourism products and services. The aim is to learn skills needed for planning and implementing tourism marketing and for using a multitude of integrated marketing mix tools for various target groups, business environments and situations.

After completing the course, students will be able to:

• Understand the special features and tools of marketing tourism products and services.
• Analyze factors influencing tourism marketing and be familiar with planning, implementing and monitoring marketing in the field of tourism.
• Apply tourism marketing strategies, planning principles and integrated marketing mix tools for various target markets, business environments and situations.

Content (course unit)

• What are customer needs and requirements for tourism products and services in consumer and business-to-business markets?
• What are the special features, elements, tools and processes of tourism marketing?
• What do the decisions of integrated tourism marketing mix and branding include, how is the value chain created and how is planning and implementation of tourism marketing done?
• What kind of media and technological solutions exist for interactive marketing of tourism products and services and what online business possibilities offer for tourism marketing?
• How to draw up a marketing plan for diverse tourism businesses?

Prerequisites (course unit)

-

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to define the basic concepts and specific features of tourism marketing. The student can explain the strategic marketing planning, implementing and monitoring process in tourism marketing. He/she participates in the given marketing task taking responsibility for his/her own performance.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to apply marketing planning process for making a marketing plan for a tourist business. The student is able to work responsibly and engage in a group work contributing to the success.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student masters the concepts and principles of tourism marketing and their relationships. The student is able to develop a fluent and well reasoned marketing plan and has good capabilities to apply the learning in the tourism context with different types of products and services. The individual contribution in the class and team have been especially active, responsible and constructive.

Assessment scale

0-5

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 09.01.2024

Timing

01.01.2024 - 06.03.2024

Credits

6 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sami Kalliokoski
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

Transportation costs and inventory considerations are significant drivers of total logistics and supply chain management costs. This course expands on the earlier Principles of Supply Chain Management course, providing detailed concepts and applications for freight transportation considerations in supply chains. This will include modal comparisons and contrasts of operational, financial, marketing, and information technology tools/software available in the freight and supply chain industries. Collaboration and competition between and among the modes will be explored to understand specific tactics to improve modal and supply chain efficiencies and competitive alternatives in both the global and domestic markets. Additionally, current trends in freight transportation and supply chain management across the globe will be studied and discussed to consider strategies and tactics to shape, manage, and respond to those trends.



After completing the course, students will be able to:

Understand the European Transportation Policies
Able to calculate all the costs related to the transportation operations
Manage the domestic and global transportation processes based on cases studies
Understand and work with the transportation documents
Calculate the CO2 emissions and define the risks in transport.

Content (course unit)

The EU Transportation white and green papers
The Transportaion systems: Roal, Sea, rail, air and intermodal
Freight forwarders operations
Risks and safety in transportation operations
Sustainability in transport.

Prerequisites (course unit)

--The Basics of logistics is a prerequisite to this course.
This course may require a visits to ports in Finland and overseas to complete the best learning outcomes

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in transportation management. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations. He/she demonstrates basic skills.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in transportation management. The student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. He/she is able to explain transportation roles, tasks and challenges well. The student is capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in transportation management. He/she has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of transportation management. The student demonstrates high skill level in transportation management, creates value and shares information with other participants. He/she is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations.

Location and time

According to Lukkari

Exam schedules

Info during the first lecture

Assessment methods and criteria

Grading based on TAMK general rules

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

Classroom teaching
Project learning
Group learning
Excursion TBD

Learning materials

Course Book: Bloomberg, LeMay and Hanna, 2002. Logistics

OTHER REFERENCES
Bhatnagar, A. 2009. Textbook of Supply Chain Management. Lucknow, IN: WordPress.

Simchi-Levi, D., Kaminsky, P., & Simchi-Levi, E. 2004. Managing the Supply Chain : The Definitive Guide for the Business Professional. New York: McGraw-Hill Professional.

Student workload

Info during the first lecture

Content scheduling

N.A.

Completion alternatives

N.A.

Practical training and working life cooperation

N.A.

International connections

N.A.

Further information

N.A.

Assessment criteria - satisfactory (1-2) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to identify basic level knowledge in transportation management. The student is capable of applying some knowledge to relevant, working life situations. He/she demonstrates basic skills.

Assessment criteria - good (3-4) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to determine main tasks and challenges in transportation management. The student can apply the knowledge in verbal conversations and written deliverables. He/she is able to explain transportation roles, tasks and challenges well. The student is capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations.

Assessment criteria - excellent (5) (Not in use, Look at the Assessment criteria above)

The student is able to master tasks, challenges and different modes in transportation management. He/she has a professional level of knowledge and wide understanding of transportation management. The student demonstrates high skill level in transportation management, creates value and shares information with other participants. He/she is exceptionally capable of applying all the acquired knowledge to relevant, working life situations.

Enrolment period

02.12.2023 - 16.01.2024

Timing

17.01.2024 - 21.02.2024

Credits

2 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

International Business

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Sean Morga
Person in charge

Sean Morga

Groups
  • 24KVHN1K
    International Business Exchange Student Group Spring 2024
  • 22IB

Objectives (course unit)

This warehouse management course covers the basics of business warehouse management. The most common warehousing operations, practices and topics are covered, like the use of WMS with practices of the voice picking systems and RFID-technology applications (www.logivo.fi). The objective is to understand the warehousing acitivies, the related costs in the entire SCM. This course has also a contribution and link to the transportaion planning and ERP course (SAP). The learning plattform ( Logistics Redesign will be used to demonstrate the SCM design an optimisation tools.

After completing the course, students will be able to:

What are the new challenges in supply chain management process?
How to operate in distribution centers, warehouses and terminals?
How to control and optimize inventories?
What is warehouse inventory system?
What is material handling about?
What are the value added services in a distribution center?
What are the picking techniques used?

Content (course unit)

Distribution centers as a facilities in the SCM
Inventory Management advanced
WM cycle and operations
WM picking technics
Labeling, tracebelity and RFID solutions

Prerequisites (course unit)

- The Basics of logistics is a prerequisite to this course

Further information (course unit)

-

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student is able to recognise common level attributes relevant to warehouse management in an organisation's activity. The student understands the basic logics of storing and activities connected to it. He/she can identify material, information and financial flows relating to warehouse management. The student can recognise and analyse both tangible and intangible structural elements of warehousing. He/she can apply the acquired knowledge in simple professional challenges.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student can analyse warehousing functions in details. He/she knows the basic steering logics of material flows internally, within an organisation, and externally, between the various value chain operators. The student can calculate and follow-up inventory. He/she understands how to organise distribution centres, warehouses and terminals so that they will provide optimal value added services.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student knows the most common warehousing operations and practices, together with systemic knowledge regarding WMS. The student can manage cost, quality, time and material related issues from warehouse management perspective. The student is able to cope with any WH related challenges which may occur in the organisation's daily activities. He/she can independently optimise warehousing related activities, suggest a suitable putaway, storing and picking technique, as well as manage the daily WH routines. Also the student possesses some managerial level strategic abilities in WHM.

Location and time

17.01.2024 08.00 - 11.00 in B5-20
24.01.2024 08.00 - 11.00 in B5-20
31.01.2024 08.00 - 11.00 in B5-20
07.02.2024 08.00 - 11.00 in B5-20
14.02.2024 08.00 - 11.00 in B5-20
21.02.2024 08.00 - 11.00 in B5-20

Exam schedules

Final exam will be given on the last class meeting

Assessment methods and criteria

According to TAMK evaluation criterias (0,1-5)
- Knowing
- Doing
- Being

Assessment scale

0-5

Teaching methods

- Lectures
- Flipped class sessions
- Inquiry-based learning
- Collaborative learning
- Project-based learning
- Case-based learning

Learning materials

- Presentation material
- Assigned books
- Articles
- Case studies
- Video

Student workload

Students are expected to:
- Attend sessions
- Participate in group discussions and activities
- Complete the exam
- Study materials given to them on their own time

Content scheduling

Distribution centers, other facilities in SCM
Inventory Management advanced
WM cycle and operations
WM picking techniques
Labeling, tracebelity and RFID solutions, technology

Topics related to sustainability will run parallel to the course themes.

Completion alternatives

N/A

Practical training and working life cooperation

Knowledge gained from the course can be applied to various roles in warehouse operations.

International connections

Multiple global case studies will be used in the course

Further information

N/A

Enrolment period

02.07.2024 - 04.09.2024

Timing

03.09.2024 - 11.12.2024

Credits

3 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Unit

TAMK Languages and Communication

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Teachers
  • Emmanuel Abruquah
  • Janne Hopeela
Person in charge

Janne Hopeela

Groups
  • 23IB
    International Business, syksy 2023, kaikki

Objectives (course unit)

This course deals with academic communication in sufficient depth and detail to enable students to present research work and write reports in academic style, as may be required for other courses in this degree programm. Most of the topics covered will also be relevant to writing a final thesis, so this course can be considered as a basic introduction to that process.

After completing the course, the students will be able to:

- Demonstrate familiarity with the principles of academic communication.
- Access and critically evaluate relevant source materials.
- Get familiar with the concept of plagiarism and know how to avoid it in their own work.
- Incorporate in-text references to source materials and compile a list of sources, following TAMK requirements.
- Produce academic texts which meet set criteria: clear, accurate and formal English, coherent structure.
- Present constructive and well-justified verbal arguments and feedback in formal, face-to-face academic settings, such as seminars and public lectures.
- Utilize resources and learning strategies to develop their own communication skills independently.

Content (course unit)

What are the key features of academic communication and how does it differ from organizational communication?
What are the roles of verbal and written communication in the academic context?
What norms and standards must academic writing meet?
What stages must a a writer process to produce an academic text?

Assessment criteria, satisfactory (1-2) (course unit)

The student communicates in comprehensible English overall and shows some awareness of the norms for different types of text. References to source materials are included where appropriate.

Assessment criteria, good (3-4) (course unit)

The student's English is mainly clear and appropriate. Written work meets the norms for different types of text, including scientific reporting. Oral communication is professional. Requirements regarding participation, meeting deadlines etc. are mainly fulfilled.

Assessment criteria, excellent (5) (course unit)

The student's written English is formal and accurate and displays appropriate variation in style, reports meet the norms for different types of text. He/she shows ability to access and select appropriate information. References to source materials are incorporated accurately and in a variety of ways, source materials are expertly paraphrased. Oral expression is fluent and professional.

Assessment scale

0-5

Enrolment period

28.07.2024 - 26.08.2024

Timing

27.08.2024 - 31.07.2025

Credits

60 op

Mode of delivery

Contact teaching

Campus

TAMK Main Campus

Teaching languages
  • English
Seats

0 - 2

Degree programmes
  • Bachelor's Degree Programme in International Business
Groups
  • AVOINAMK

Content (course unit)

Studies consist of first year studies of the degree programme.

You will study full time in the degree programme´s student group. Open UAS students are reserved two (2) study places in the group.

The enrollment will start on 1 August at 9 am and end on 2 August at 11.59 pm. If there are still study places left after the enrollment period ends, the period may be continued. Places are filled on a first-come-first-serve basis and registration is done in our online store.

The fee for the open path studies is 300 euros. You pay 150 € when enrolling and 150 € will be invoiced in September.

Path studies in English require good oral and written English language skills.


The fee for the first year is the same for all students. If you apply to become a degree student and are not an EU/EEA student, you will have a tuition fee like all the other non-EU/EEA –students.

Degree application and student selection
You can apply for admission to the degree programme based on your Open UAS studies. If you start path studies in the autumn 2024, you will be able to apply to become a degree student in the application on the basis of Open UAS studies in studyinfo.fi in May 2025.
Student selection is made considering your completed amount of credit points and study success. Study success means the GPA of the studies completed during your Open UAS Path Studies. If necessary, students are placed in order by their GPA (highest to lowest).
Required amount of credit points (Bachelor in International Business 50 cr) has to be completed by 31 July 2025.
Student Benefits
Open UAS students do not receive Kela’s financial aid for students or any other student benefits. If you are a customer of TE Services, you should check your study right with them before signing up for Open UAS studies.

Assessment scale

0-5